Date of planning:

Date of teaching:
Period 1
HƯỚNG DẪN SỬ DỤNG SÁCH GIÁO KHOA, TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP, PHƯƠNG
PHÁP HỌC TẬP BỘ MÔN
I. Objectives
- By the end of this lesson , Ss can know something about England.
- Helps sts understand sth about English and have the effective ways to learn it.
II. Teaching aids.
- Book, planning, picture
III. Procedure
A. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance: 6A1,6A4…………………..
B. New lesson.
Sts’ and T’s activities Contents
1. Warm up.
- Chatting: What aspects of learning - Listening…
English do you find the most difficult?
2. Activities
A- T. asks sts some questions about - It located in North-west coast of
England. Europe with very mild weather not too
- What do you know about England? hot but not too cold.
T. gives sts something about England - It consists of four parts: England,
and English. Wales, Scotland and Ireland.
- It’s official name is the UK
- Each part has its own flag of UK.
-There are many interesting things of
England and you’ll gradually know
about them in the progress of learning
English.
English is used all over the world in
* English is an international language. every aspect of life.
Sts work in groups to talk about It’s the international language of every
England in Vietnamese. fields: communication,trade,economic,
cooperation......

B- Introduce the English book. Student It consists of 6 units

book and Workbook - Unit 1: My new school – 7 lessons
- Unit 2: My home
- Unit 3: My friends

1
 - Review 1
- Unit 4:My Neighbourhood
- Unit 5: Natural Wonders of the
world
- Unit 6 : Our Tet Holiday
- Review 2

- How can you learn English well.

- English is not too difficult but it

requires your working hard.
- Focusing on vocabulary you come
across. Write sentence with the new
words to understand more
5.Home work:
- Review the lesson everyday.
- Practise English everyday
Prepare for unit 1: My new school.

2
 Ngày soạn : 12/ 8/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 19/ 8/ 2016
Period 1: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I. Teaching points:
- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand “ A special day”, review vocabs about school
things.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students Board & contents

Warm up A. WARM UP. (Network)
(Network) ruler
-Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get Ss to write down vocabs about school
things. School things
-Give feed back and decide which is the
winner of the game.
-Provide some more vocabs about school things.

B. NEW LESSON
-Present new words. * Vocabulary
- excited (adj): hào hứng
- Check: Rub out and Remember. - calculator (n): máy tính
- uniform (n): đồng phục
- smart (adj): thông minh
- put on = wear: mang, mặc, đội.
1. Listen and Read 1.Listen & Read
? Look at the picture.
What is Phong doing?
Who are Vy and Duy?
Where are they going?
Why is it a special day? a. *Answers: 1T
- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to do 2T
the true, false exercise. 3F
-Get them to read aloud the answers. 4T
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check. 5F
-Give feed back.
- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to b. *Answers:
3
find the expression. 1.oh dear: Express surprise (negative)
1.oh dear. 2. You’ll see 2. You’ll see: “ You’ll find out”
3. come in 4. Sure 3. come in: invite sb in
4. Sure: “yes”/ alright.
- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions. c. Example:
- Call some pairs to speak aloud. A: Oh dear. I forgot my calculator.
- Correct some. B: That’s OK, you can borrow mine.
A: Thank you.
2. Poem.
-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the Example.
poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask Khanh is going back to school today
qs to check Ss’ understanding of the poem. His friends…….
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their
partner then read the poem aloud.
- Listen &correct
3. Matching.
- Ask Ss to match the words with the school Answer key:
things. 1. b- pencil sharpener 6. i- pecil case
- Let ss listen and read. 2. e- compass 7. f- notebook
- Explain some words if necessary. 3. j- school bag 8. a- bicycle
4. d- rubber 9. g- ruler
5. c- calculator 10.h- textbook

C. CONSOLIDATION
- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the
things and say out the words, make up sentences
with the words if there is time.
-Ss draw pictures next to new words in their
vocabulary book.

Homework - Learn by heart new vocabulary

-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. - Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Asign home work. -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

4
 Ngày soạn : 13/ 8/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 20/ 8/ 2016
Period 2: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:
- Review vocabularies.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /ou/ and /A/
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.
Teacher & Students Board & contents
A. WARM UP
Have Ss work in 2 teams Math
-Get them to write the subjects they have subjects
learnt.
-Give feed back
English
B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.
1. Listen and repeat the words.
-Play the recording and let ss listen. Physic exercises
-Play again and pause for them to repeat English vocabulary
each word. History football
-Ss repead- read Home work lessons
-Correct pronunciation. Judo music
School lunch science
2. Put the words into groups.
-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1 play do have study
into groups. Football Homewo School Physics
- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms. music rk lunch English
-Check the answer. Explain to them Judo lessons History
which words go with each verb. exercises Vocabs
science
3. Put one of these words in each blank.
lesson football
science judo
-Tell Ss to do the task individually. homework
-Then call some ss to write on the board. 1. I do……with my friend, Vy.
-Correct their mistakes. 2. Duy plays….for the school team.
3. All the…. new school are interesting.
4. they are healthy. They do….every day.
5
 5. I study maths, English and…..on
Mondays.
Key. 1. homework 2. football
3. lessons 4. judo
5. science
4. Write sentences about yourself using
-Ask Ss to write sentences about the combination above.
themselves in their notebooks, using Eg: I/ We have English lessons on Tuesday
combination above. and Thursday.
- Ss write as many sentences as posible. ………………………
-Go around the class and correct some.
II. PRONUNCIATION
-Let Ss practice the sounds /ou/ and /A/ 5. Listen and repeat
together. Ask Ss to observe the T’s lip 1. /əʊ/ :judo going homework open
positions for these two sounds. 2. /ʌ/: brother Monday mother month
-Ss look at the T’s lip position and listen
and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen
and repeat.
- Ss listen and repeat as many times as
posible. 6. Listen to the words and put them into
-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to two groups.
work individually. Key.
- Ss work in individual then check their /əʊ/ /ʌ/
answer in groups. Rode Some
-Call some to write the answers on the Don’t Monday
board . Hope Month
-Give feed back. Homework Come
Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat post one
sentence by sentence. Help them to 7. Listen and repeat. Underline the
recognize the two sounds then underline sounds /ʊə/ and /ʌ/ you hear.
them in the sentences.
Home work C. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main points of the -Learn by heart new words.
lesson. -Practice the sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/.
-Assign home work. -Do Ex…in Ex book.
* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

6
 Ngày soạn : 15/ 8/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 22/ 8/ 2016
Period 3: Unit 1 : My new school
Lesson 3: A closer look 2
I. Teaching points:
- Review Present simple and Present continuous tenses.
- Practice speaking, reading and writing using these tenses
II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write A. OLD LESSON
sentences. Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.
-correct, give marks. Eg: I play football for the school team.

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Review the present simple.
-Introduce “Miss Nguyet is interviewing Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.
Duy for the school newsletter. Write the * Key.
correct form of the verbs.” 1. has 2. Do you have
-Let Ss do the task individually in 5 3. love 4. Does Vy walk
minutes. 5. ride 6. teaches
- Correct their answer. Or give 7. doesn’t play 8. reads
explaination if necessary. 9. go 10. do

-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the Ex2.Role-play the interview.

interview.
-Observe and help ss when and where
necessary.
-Correct Ss’pronunciation & verb form.
Ex3. Correct sentences.
Eg:
-Let Ss read the example to understand Duy’s new school has a small playground.
the task. - Duy’s new school has a large playground.
-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their Key:
notebooks, refering to the interview. 1. Duy lives near here.
-Go around to help. 2. Duy likes/ loves his new school.
-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board. 3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
-Check their answer sentence by 4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.
sentence. 5. At break time, Phong reads in the library.
GRAMMAR:
7
 The present simple.
- Then ask ss to give the rule and use of Form: (+) S(I, You, We, They) + V
the present simple themselves. S(She, He, It) + Vs/es
- Give more examples. (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V
1. I always walk to school. (?) Do/ Does + S + V ?
2. He always walks to school. Use: Something often happens or fixed.
3. We don’t like playing football. Ex4: Make questions then interview.
4. She doesn’t like playing football. 1.You/ ride your bicycle / to school.
-Do you ride your bicycle to school?
- Ss work in pairs. Take turns to ask 2. You/ read/ in the library/ at break time.
questions and give answers. 3. You/ like your new school.
-Go round and correct mistakes or give 4. Your friends / go to school / with you.
help when necessary. 5. You/ do your home work/ after school.

II. Review the present continuous.

-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in Ex5. Underline the present continuous in
getting started. And find out the verbs Getting started.
used in the present continuous tense. Eg: is knocking…, is having…, are
-Write on the board. wearing…
GRAMMAR. The present continuous.
Form:
(+) S + am/is/are + V-ing.
(-) S + am/is/are not + V-ing
(?) Am/Is/Are + S + V-ing?
Use :Something is happening now.
Ex6: Complete the sentences with the
correct form of the verbs.
-Ask Ss to study the example first then Eg: -Yummy! I (have)........school lunch with
do the exercices. my new friends.
- Correct. -Yummy! I am having school lunch with
my new friends.
1. I am not playing football now. I’m tired.
2. Shh! They are studying in the library.
3. Duy and Phong aren’t doing their
homework.
4. Now I am having an English lesson with
Mr Lee.
5. Phong, Vy and Duy are riding their bicycles
to school now.
-Ask them to say the differences Something often happens or fixed: The
between the two tenses. present simple
Something is happening now: the present
8
 continuous
Ex7: Choose the correct tense of the verbs.
1. My family have/ are having dinner now.
-Ask Ss to do the task in pairs. 2. Mai wears/ is wearing her uniform on
-Call some to give their answers. Mondays and Saturdays.
- correct their mistakes and explain 3. The school year in Vietnam starts/ is stating
why… on Seps 5th
4. Now Duong watches/ is watching Ice Age
on Video.
5. Look! The girls kip/ are skipping in the
school yard.
Ex8. Read Vy’s e-mail to her friend.

-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.

C. HOME WORK
-Summarize the main points of the 1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two
lesson. tenses.
-Guide Ss to do home work. 2. Do Ex8 at home:
-Underline things that often happen or are
fixed.
-then underline things that are happening.
-Compare Vy’s first week with yours.
Eg: + Both Vy and I are having an interesting
first week.
+ I wear uniform every day but Vy wears
uniform only on Mondays and Saterdays.
+ ….
3. New lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

9
 Ngày soạn : 19/ 8/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 26/ 8/ 2016
Period 4: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION
I.Teaching points:
-To develop speaking skill and communicate with their friends about making friends and
how a good friend is.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters.
III. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students Board & contents

Warm up A. WARM- UP
Hang man Hangman
Have Ss play the game _ _ _ _ _ _ _
-Get them to listen to the eliciting and (1)
guess the word (2)  (3)
-Ss try to find out the letter building (4) (5)
the word.
-T gives feed back and decide which
is the winner of the game. (6) (7)
 excited
Pre- B. NEW LESSON
-Present new words. Tell Ss that these 1. Vocabulary
vocabs will appear in the task that -pocket money: tiền tiêu vặt
follow. -share (v): chia se
-Ss listen and answer to find out -help (v): giúp đơ
the meaning of the words. -remember (v): nhơ
-note down. -classmate: bạn cùng lơp
Have Ss play game: ROR

While - 2.Game :
- Ask some Ss how they often make Ask your new friends.
friends, what they often say when they - Are you from around here?
first meet a new friend. What question - Do you like pop music?
they often ask…. - How much pocket money do you get?
- Ss listen and answer. - What is your favorite subject at school?
- Let Ss read and tick the questions - Are you hungry?
individually. - Do you play football?

10
-Then ask them to discuss in group. - How do you gat to school every day?
-Go round and ask why or why not they - Where do you go shopping?
ticked this or that question.
-Allow Ss some time to write questions
on a piece of paper, share them with the
class or group.
3. Friendship quiz
- Ask Ss to give qualities of a good Eg:
friend in class (adjective). - friendly, generous, helpful, cheerfful,
- Ss give as many words as possible. reserved, humorous, socable, nice, polite…
-Divide the class into groups of 4or 5 .
- Ss take turns to interview the other
members, using the questions.
- Encourage Ss to give nice sentences Eg: “Friend are forever”
about friendship. ……………………..
Post- Eg:
-Choose some Ss to present to the class “This is Nam, he is my classmate. He is very
about their good friends and why they helpful, he often helps me in doing home
are good friends. work…..”

-Summarize the main point of the 4. Home work

lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabs
-Assign home work. -Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1. (reading)

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................

11
 Ngày soạn : 20/ 8/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 27/ 8/ 2016
Period 5: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 5: Skill 1 - Reading
I. Teaching points:
- To develop reading comprehension skill and to know some more new words in context:
boarding school, international school, creative students…
II.Teaching aids: - Poster
III. teaching steps

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

A. OLD LESSON.
-Call 2 Ss to tell about their good S1: He is Nam. He is sociable and…
friends.
-Correct some and give mark.

Pre- B. NEW LESSON

-Ask Ss to look at the three pictures I. Introduction.
then give their ideas about the schools Eg:-In PLC Sydney school, I can see some
in the pictures. girls are practicing doing something. So I think
-Encourage Ss to give as many ideas it is a comfortable school. It is a very good
as possible. school.
-……….

While II. Reading

-Let Ss read the three passages to 1. Ex1.
check their ideas.
-Ss do the task indidually in 5 minutes
-Note some information.
2. Ex2. What do the words mean.
-Ask Ss to read the passages again, boarding surrounded
then find the words in the passages. international creative
Help Ss to understand the meaning of -It is a boarding school: many students study
the words: explaining or examples or and live there.
the Vietnamese equivalent. -The school is surrounded by mountains and
-Ss should pay attention to the context fields.

12
of the words. -…international school…for Ss from year 1 to
year 12, Ss learn English with foreign teachers.
-some creative students do drawings and
paitings in the art club.
-Ask Ss to read the text again to find 3. Ex3. Complete sentences.
words to finish the sentences. 1. Students study and live in a…..school. They
-Let Ss note where they found the only go home at weekend.
information that helped them 2. ……has an art club.
complete sentences. 3. There are girls’ school in…..
-Ss can discuss and compare with 4. Around An Lac school, there are fields and...
their friends. 5. At Vinabrita School, Ss learn E with…
-Correct the answer then let Ss read Key:
aloud the sentences in chorus then in 1. boarding 2. Vinabrita 3. Australia
individual. 4. mountains 5. E speaking teachers.
-Check pronunciation and intonation.
Post- III. Speaking.
Ex4:Which school would you like to go.
-Allow Ss to complete the table. Name of Reasons you Reasons you
-Ss work in groups of 4 to discuss school like it don’t like it
then complete the table. (Ss can use
the background of the school).
-Ask some to talk to the class. Background of the schools.
-PLC Sydney: an international school for girls
from kindergatern to year 12 in Sydney,
Australia.
-An Lac Lower Secondery School: a small
school in a mountainous region in Son Dong
-Discuss any common errors and Dist, Bac Giang Province.
provide further practice. -Vinabrita School: an international school for
Ss from year 1 to year 12 in Ha Noi.

-Summarize the main point of the Home work

lesson. - Learn by heart new vocab
-Assign homework. -Do exercises in work book

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

=============================================
13
 Ngày soạn : 29/ 8/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 06/ 9/ 2016
Period 7: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK
I. Teaching points:
- Through doing exercises, Ss revise the grammar points:
The simple present, the present progressive, vocabs.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. Teaching steps

Teacher & Students Board & contents

A. WARM-UP. Brainstorming.
-Have Ss work in 2 teams. + calculator
-Ss write as many words as possible. School things. + compass
+…
B. NEW LESSON.
I. Vocabs.
-Ss write the words. 1. Match the pictures.
- Correct mistakes. 1. dictionary 4. notebook
-Repeat the words. 2. uniform 5. compass
3. pencil sharpener 6. calculator
2. Match A with B.
1. b
Ss write the answer. 2. c
-Correct 3. a
4. d
3. Listen and write down the words you
hear.
-Pay the recording twice. Play: sports, badminton, music.
-Ss listen then write words in the correct Do: morning exercise, homework
places. Study: new words, geography.
-Give correction. Have: English lesson, a new book.

II. Grammar.
4. Complete the sentences using present
simple.
-Call on Ss to give the answers. 1. He comes from Da Nang.

14
 2. Do you study English? No, I don’t.
-Give feed back and the correct answers. 3. She walks to school with her friends.
4. I do my homework after school.
5. Mr Vo teaches physics at my school.
6. The team play football on saterday.
5. Complete the sentences using present
continuous.
-Ss do Ex individually. 1. are doing
- call some to do on the board. 2. are riding
- Correct. 3. is…studying
4. is having
5. am walking
6. is teaching
6. Complete sentences with the correct
form of the verbs.
-Ss do Ex individually. 1. lives
- call some to do on the board. 2. is
- Correct. 3. has
4. is walking
5. go
6. study
7. are working
8. loves
III. Communication
-Ss do Ex individually. 7. Match the questions with the
- call some to do on the board. answers.
- Correct. b- g d- f e- a h- g
8. Role-play.

C. PROJECT
-Ask Ss to write their dream school at home Your dream school
-Divide the class into 3 groups.
-Ask Ss to use the pictures and their
imagination.
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. D. HOMEWORK.
-Asign home work. -Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 2 – Getting
Started.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
15
 ...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 28/ 8/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 07/ 9/ 2016

Period 8: Unit 2: MY HOME

Lesson 1: Getting started
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- listen and read for specific information about rooms and houses.
- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My house".
II. Content:
- Vocab: house lexical items.
- Grammar: +Prepositions of place and: “there is/ there isn’t/ there are/ there aren’t .”
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
I. Warm up
- Teacher writes on the board: “ My home ” - Listen and answer individually.
and ask what “home” means to them.
- T. writes their answer on the board.
- T. explains it can be the house or
apartment where you live or can refer to a
family living together.

I. Presentation
1. New words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach Apartment (n) căn hộ
vocab (situation, realia) Cousin (n) anh, em họ

16
 - T. reads the new words and ss. repeat . living room (n) phòng khách
- Checking vocab: Slap the board bedroom (n) phòng ngủ
* Set the scene: kitchen (n) phòng bếp
- Ask ss to look at the picture on page 30. bathroom (n) phòng tắm
? What are Mi and Nick doing? - Read in chorus.
? Where are they? - Answer the questions individually.
-We are going to listen and read a dialogue
between Mi and Nick. They are talking on - look at the picture on page 30.
skype = a system that allows you to make - They are playing computer.
telephone call using your computer playing games
2. Listen and read using the internet.
a).T. plays the recording the first time then - They are in their house/ room.
ask ss to the family members Mi talks
about.
? - Ss listen the second time and check the - Listen and give the answers.
answers. - Listen and check the correct answers.

Grandparents Uncle
b)- Allow ss to read the conversation again Dad V Aunt V
and complete the sentences. Mum V Cousin V
- Teacher gets feedback. Brother V
- Work independently then share answer
with their partner.
1: TV- sofa 4: noisy
2: town house 5: three
3: sitting on the sofa
Key: A: on E: in front of
II. Preposition B: next to F: between
1.Prepositions of place ? C: behind G: under
? Ask ss if they know the preposition in the D: in
box. - Work individually.
? Have ss do this exercise in pairs. Key:
2. Ask ss to write the sentences 1. F. The dog is between the bookshelf
individually then call 6 ss to write their and the bed.
answer on the board 3. F. The clock is between the pictures.
3. –Explain some new words. 4. F. The cat is in front of the
Pillow (n): cái gối computer.
Cap (n) : cái mũ 5. F. The cap is next to the pillow.
17
 Mouse (n): con chuột
Let ss to look at the picture of the room and
do ex.4 in pairs.
-Ask ss to correct the false sentences.
4. Have ss look at the picture again and - Answer the questions.
answer the questions. Key: 1. They are on the desk and the
bookshelf
2. They are on the floor.
3. Yes. It is
4. No. they are on the bed
5. It’s behind the bookshelf.
6. No, it isn’t. It’s next to the desk.
III. Consolidation . - Answer individually.
? What is the topic of the lesson today?
V. Homework
?Write ex.5 in the notebook. - Take note.
? Do exercises in the workboook.
? Prepare: Closer Look 1

Adjustments:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………................

=============================================

Ngày soạn : 2/ 9/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 9/ 9/ 2016
Period 9: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I.Objectives
- Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
- Ss read the conversation between Mi and Nick again ,understand it then complete the
sentence.
-Using the prepositions of place: in/on/behind/in front of/ between, behind, under/ next to.
II. Preparations.
-Teacher: Extra boards.

18
-Students: Prepare the new words, practice pronouncing these words

III. Procedures.
Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents
1.Warm up. – To introduce the new *VOCABULARY
lesson. / Play a game : Drawing.
- Play a game : T asks Ss to draw their EX1. Name the rooms of the house.
house with their imagination, don’t care of a. living room b. bedroom c. attic
the beauty.(1 minute)-One student goes to d. bathroom e. kitchen f. hall
the board and draws, then name the rooms
of the house. EX2.Name the things in each room in 1.
- T checks with the whole class. 1.living room: lamp, sofa…
2. Presentation. 2. bedroom: bed, lamp, picture…
- T asks Ss to work in groups of 8 .T write 3.kitchen:fridge,cupboard…
the name of the rooms on the board, in 4.bathroom: bath, sink, toilet
different places. 5.hall: picture
3.Practice
 Ss in each group choose the number for EX3. Listen and repeat the words.
their group go to their group , discuss EX4.In pairs, ask and answer questions
and run to the board as fast as he/she could to guess the room.
to write the name of things. T: What’s in the room?
-T tell the Ss which group is win. Oanh: A sofa and a television.
-The whole class listen to the tape and T: Is it the living room?
repeat the words they hear. Oanh: Yes.
-T can model this activity with a student. */ PRONUNCIATION. /Z/ ; /S/; /IZ/
Ask Ss to work in pairs. Call some pairs to EX5+6. Listen and repeat the words. Then put
practice in front of the class. the words in the correct column.
/z/ /s/ /iz/
posters lamps, fridges
tables, sinks,
beds, toilets
-Have some Ss read out the words first. wardrobes
Then play the recording for them to listen EX7. Read the conversation below.
and repeat the words. Underline the final s/es in the words and
-T gives the way to pronounce these words write / z /; /s/; /iz/
19
in 3 ways. /z/ : things, pictures
4.Production. /s/: lights, chopsticks
/IZ/ dishes, vases.
EX8: Listen to the conversation and
-Ss do this exercise individually first then repeat. Pay attention to /z/; /s/; and /IZ/ at
compare their answers with a partner.(One the end of the words. Then practice the
student goes to the board and write) conversation with a partner.
- T guides the way to do ,and asks Ss to
practice.

5. Homework.
-Learn by heart the new words. Write 3
lines for each new word.
-Prepare the new lesson: Check dictionary
these words: wall, a ceiling fan.

Adjustments:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………….................
……………………………………………………………………………………………................

=============================================

Ngày soạn : 9/ 9/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 16/ 9/ 2016
Period 10: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: A closer look 2

I.Objectives:
By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :
- review the structures THERE IS / ARE…….. to make sentenses.
- to discribe a room in a house.
II. Content
1. Vocabulary
Ceiling fan, cupboard, cooker , ceiling light
2. Structures
There is/isn’t a picture in the wall.
20
 There are/ aren’t two lamps in the room
Is there a picture in the wall?
Are there two lamps in the room?

III. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities
IV. Procedures.

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

1.Warmmer. - Play agame : Brainstorming - Group work:
Divide the class into two groups. Call each Answer: living room
student in each group to go to the board to Kitchen
write words in turn in 2 mins. Which group Bathroom…
having more words is the winner ………….

Rooms in
the house

Living room
- T gives remarks and marks for the winner.
B. NEW LESSON
1. Presentation (10') Listen and write words in the note
Vocabulary: book.

Ceiling fan (n)

cupboard(n) ( use pictures to present ) Ceiling fan (n) quạt trần
cooker (n) Cupboard (n) tủ bếp
ceiling light (n) (real thing) cooker (n) nồi cơm điện
<+>Checking: *Rubout and remember ceiling light (n) đèn trần
Teacher prepares two pictures of two rooms
with some furniture removed from the second.
21
 Ask Ss to look at the two pictures and
introduce the new structures: Look at the pictures and make
Singular: sentences about the two ones.
1st picture: There is a picture in the wall. Write down.
2nd picture: There isn’t a picture in the wall.
Plural:
1st picture: There are two lamps in the room
2nd picture: There aren’t two lamps in the
room
Yes/No question:
Is there a sofa in the first picture?
-Yes, there is ( No, there isn’t)
Are there any lamps in the second
picture?
- Yes, there are (no, there aren’t)
2. Practice: Do exercises in group.
Divide the class into 4 groups then guide each
group to do their activities, Ex1+2
Group 1 does exercise number 1: Write is or Key: 1- is/isn’t 2- are/aren’t
are in each sentense. 3- are/aren’t 4- is/isn’t
Group 2 does exercise number 2:Write isn’t or 5- are/aren’t
aren’t into each sentence. Ex 3:
Group 3 does exercise number 3:Write positive There is/isn’t a TV next to /on the table.
sentences There is/isn’t a brown dog in the
Group 4 does exercise number 3: Write kitchen.
negative sentences. …………
Call Ss in each group to practice. There are/aren’t lamps in the bedroom.

Exercise 4: Complete the description:

Let Ss look at the picture and complete the Answer key:
description about the kitchen in Mi’s house (p 1- is 2- is 3- are 4- are 5-
38) aren’t 6- isn’t
- Call two students to read the text. Individual work
Exercise 5 Example:
Have Ss do this exercise individualy, then give Are there two bathrooms in your
the T the answers. house?
Exercise 6: Ask Ss to work in pairs then call Pair work
some Ss to report their partner’s answer to the Example:
22
 class Are there two bathrooms in your
house?
Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.

Production:
Exercise 7
Ask Ss to work in pairs:
Teacher can model the conversation with a Work in pair
Student before Ss do this in pairs.
- Where’s your room?
- What’s your favorite room? My room is on the second floor
- Is there fridge in your room? It’s my bedroom.
- Are there two lamps in your room? No, there isn’t. It’s in the kitchen
Ask a good Ss to summarize their partners to No, there is one lamps and one
the whole class. ceiling lamp in my room…..
Example:
I live in a small house in the city with my
parents and my sister. There are 5 rooms in my
house: a living room, a kitchen, a bathroom
and two bed rooms. I like my room best. There
is a ceiling light and .... There isn’t a ceiling
fan ........

Homework: Ask Ss to do exercises in the Do assigments.

work book and make sentenses with new
words.
- Describe the room you like best.
- Prepare a new lesson : Communication

Adjustments:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………….................

23
 Ngày soạn : 10/ 9/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 18 / 9/ 2016
Period 11: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson : Communication

I.Objectives:
By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :
- review the grammar points: W-H questions (where/howmany…), there is/there are,
preposition of place.
- discribe any rooms as well as houses.
II. Content
1. Vocabulary
Town house, countryhouse, villa, stilt house, apartment.
2. Structures: Review present simple and structures: There is/ are……
+ Where does Mi live? – She lives in a town house.
+ How many rooms are there in Mi’s house? – There are 5 rooms in her house.
III. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities
IV. Procedures.
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
I. Warmmer Individual work
Chatting: Answer:
- Where do you live?
- Do you live in a big or small house?
- How many rooms are there in your house?
- Is there a garden in your house?
- Are there large windows in your room?
- Which room do you like best?

II. Presentation (15')

1- Pre- speaking
Extra vocabulary
-Have Ss guess the meaning of the vocabulary
24
and tell Ss that this vocabulary will apear in
the tasks that follow. Write new words into the notebooks
Town house:
Country house: Town house: nhà ở phố
Villa (using pictrues to present) Country house: nhà ở nông thôn
Stilt house Villa biệt thự
Apartment = flat Stilt house nhà sàn
Apartment = flat căn hộ
-Ask Ss to look at the pictures about Mi’s
grandparents’house and complete the
sentenses.
Play a game:-Devide the class into 4 groups of Group work
8 students. Let them complete the text in turn. Exercise 1:
Which group doing the most quickly and Answer:
having most correct answers is the winner. 1- country 2- are 3- is 4- are
- Let a good Ss descrbe Mi’s 5- on 6- next to 7- on 8- is
grandparents’house.
T gives remarks and marks.
2- While- speaking:
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures of Nick’s house
and Mi’s house on page 25 to find the Work in pairs to find the difference
difference between the two houses in pairs between Nick’s house and Mi’s house
which has the most differences will be the Exercise 2
winner Nick’s house Mi’s house
- Small big
- A country house a town house
- trees no trees
- two windows many windows
T looks at Nick’s house and models with a ……………
student St: (look at Mi’s house)
-Nick lives in a country house. Where - She lives in a town house.
does Mi live?
-How many rooms are there in Mi’s
house? - There are 6 rooms. What about Nick’s
………. house? How many rooms are there?
Ask Ss to work in pair not to look at each ………
other’s picture and make similar
conversations. Work in pairs
25
 Call a good St to describe Mi’s house.
Give Ss 5- 7 minutes to draw a simple plan of
the house on page 40. Then ask them to work Individual work
in pair to tell each other about their house
Exercise 3
3- Post – speaking: Draw the house and then practice in pair
Call some Ss to describe their friends house to to tell the own house.
the class.
Let Ss correct their friends’ mistakes.
Give remarks and marks Exercise 4
- Individual work.

- correct the mistakes

III. Homework: Ask Ss to do exercises in the
work book and make sentenses with new
words. Do assigments at home.
- Describe your house.
- Prepare a new lesson : Skill 1

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
……………………………………………………………………………………………....................

=============================================

Ngày soạn : 12 / 9/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 20 / 9/ 2016
Period 12: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson : Skills 1

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:

 Read for specific information about rooms and houses.
 Ask about and describe houses, rooms, and furniture.
II. Contents:
- Vocab: home lexical items:
26
- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books and projector.
- group work, individual work
IV.Procedures

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

A. Warm up
- Ask student to draw a simple plan of their - Students work in individual then go to
house and call some students to describe the board to describe their friend’s house
their friend’s house to the class

B. NEW LESSON
I. Reading
1. Pre – reading
- Ask students to look at the pictures and the - Look at the pictures and the title on page
title on page 22 then decide what is the topic 22 then think about the topic of the text
of the text
-Ask students to look at the text but not to - Quickly look at the text and answer
read it then answer the questions the questions
1- What type of text is it?
2- What is the title of this page? What is the
topic?
3- Write three things you know about
Da Lat
- Confirm the answer to question 1 and 2 - Read the the text again to check their
1. It’s an email ideas
2. The title is “A room at the Crazy House
Hotel, Dalat ”. The topic is Nick’s weekend
at the Crazy House Hotel.
2. While – listening:
-Ask students to read the text again and the
questions - Read the text in detail to answer the
1. Is Nick with his brother and sister? questions
2. How many rooms are there in the hotel?
3.Why is the room called the Tiger room?
4. Where is his bag?
- Tell the class to underline parts of the e-
mail that help them with the answers
( Set a strick time limit to ensure Ss read the -Compare their answers with
information quickly) their partners
27
- Ask Ss to give evidence when giving the
answers
- Feedback and give the key
1. No, he isn’t
2. There are ten rooms - Copy the correct answer
3. Because there is a big tiger on the wall
4. It’s under the bed
3. Post – reading:
-Ask Ss to do exercise 4 then compare their
answer
- Check their answer then give the key
A window, a lamp, a tiger, a shelf, a desk - Find the things in the room
- Compare their answer with their
partner
- Check and correct their answer
II. Speaking.
1.Pre- speaking:
- Ask Ss to answer the question: What is - Work in pair to answer the question
there in your rooms? There is a bed , ........
2.While - speaking:
- Ask each Ss to create a new room for the
hotel and draw a plan of the room
- Ask each Ss to show the plan to their -Think about a new room for the hotel and
partner and describe their room in pairs draw a plan of the room

3.Post - speaking - Work in pair to describe their room

- Ask three students to show their partner’s
plan to the whole class and describe it -Listen and remark
- Ask Ss to choose the best plan

- Vote for the best plan

C. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. - Create a new room for your house
-Assign homework. And describe it
-Prepare new lesson: Skill 2

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
……………………………………………………………………………………………....................

28
 Ngày soạn : 13 / 9/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 21 / 9/ 2016
Period 13: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: Skill 2

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:

- listen and read for specific information about rooms and houses.
- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My home ".
- write an e-mail to a friend.
II. Contents:
- Vocab: home lexical items:
- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio and projector.
- Method: group work, individual work
IV.Procedures

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

A. Warm up
- give some home lexical items and ask ss - Students work in groups then go to the board and
to put them into suitable groups: lamp, write ( a word can be used more than once)
bed, cupboard,dishwasher,shower, table, living bedroo kitchen bathroo
chairs, ceiling fan, sink, television, room m m
picture, cooker. table bed cupboard sink
.... ... ... ...

B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening
1. Presentation (10')
Vocabulary:
fireplace (n) ( use pictures to present ) - look at the pictures and give the meanings
wardrobe (n) of new words.
? Look at the picture in your books! Ask - copy and practice reading 2 new words.
and answer about the things in the - What is this ?
picture + It’s a table.

2. Pre – listening:
* Set the sence: -hang the poster of the room.
Nick’s mother are on holiday. They are -students go to the board and stick a piece of
29
describing their room at the hotel. paper of thing on the poster.
Prediction:? Before you listen to their
description, I want you to guess where
each thing is. - copy
* some key words / phrases in the tape -practice reading
script:
. actually ( adv): thùc sù
. far corner: gãc xa
. right in front of: ngay phÝa tríc -listen to the tape script for the first time
3. While – listening: -check their prediction
- play the tape script -listen to the tape script for the second time
to draw the furniture in the correct place.

-correct their drawing.

4. Post – listening: -begin with: This is a big room in the
-let ss practice speaking by describing the hotel...
room. ( there is a big fireplace near the door. The
shelves are right in front of the window...)
-remark and give ss marks
II. Writing.
1.Pre-writing:
Show ss a sample of an e-mail ( use
Nick’s e-mail as an sample), then give
questions: + There are 5 parts.
+ How many part are there in an e-mail? + They are : the subject line, greeting,
+ What are they? introduction, body and conclusion ( students
can answer this question in Vietnamese)
+ What should we write in each part? +( Students’ answers )

-give ss the form of an e -mail

-Hang the poster of Writing tip on the + give some ways of asking about his / her
board. health.
-Ss study the Writing tip and may ask + copy into their notes.
some information.
2.While -writing:
- ask ss to look at Nick’s e-mail again to
identify the subject, greeting, + Subject: weekend away!
introduction, body and conclusion + Greeting: Hi Phong
- Give the correction. + Introduction: How are you ...
+ Body : Da lat is nice... at home
+ Conclusion: See you soon!
30
-ask ss to correct the e-mail to Nick, focus + Ss work in pairs then go to the borad and
on the puntuation and capitalisation rules write their answers.
ss learnt in unit 1. + write in the notebooks.
- correct. + read Mi’s e-mail again.
2.While -writing: Write an e-mail to
Nick,telling him about your idea for the
new room of the Crazy House Hotel. -listen and copy
-Explain the precess of writing which ss -work in groups ( if less time, ss can work at
have to follow: home)
+ P (plan): Brainstorm vocabulary about (students’ work)
+ D (draft)
+ C (check) : check dictation, puntuation,
capitalisation, parts.
-Tell Ss to pay attention to punctuation,
structural elements, linking words…

-Summarize the main point of the lesson. C. HOMEWORK

-Assign homework. -Finish an e-mail to Nick.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………......................
……………………………………………………………………………………………...................

============================================

Preparing date: 15 / 9/ /2016

Preparing date: 24/9/2016
Unit 2: MY HOME
Period 15: Looking back

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:

- Ss revise the grammar points:
+ prepositions of place
+ There is / are...
+ home lexical items
- practice writing and speaking by asking and describing a room, a house …
II. Contents:
31
- Vocab: home lexical items:
- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, pictures and projector.
- Method: group work, individual work
IV.Procedures
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
A. WARM-UP
- use exercise 1 in the page 46 to warm up -ss work in groups.
-have Ss work in 2 teams. -go to the board and write their answers
Types of building Rooms Furniture
Villa,apartments, Living Picture,
town house, stilt room, cupboard,
house, country hall, atlic, chest of
house bedroom, drawers,
kitchen wardrobe,
sofa,
-correct and give remark dishwasher,
-Group competition game: let ss in two team desk
add more words to each group. The group
that can add more word to the list and finish
first in the winner.
+ Types of building: cottage, hotel,...
+ Rooms: dinning room, rest room,
guestroom, reeding room(hall)...
+ Furniture: stool, clock...
B. NEW LESSON.
* Set the sence: You have revised in next to
vocabulary related to the topic “ My
house” , but to describe a house you have to prepositions beside
use prepositions of place. on of place
-ask ss to give prepositions of place they
have learnt behind
* exercise 2 - read the prepositions of place aloud.
-ask ss to do exercise 2. -do exercise individually.
-write sentences in their notes then go to
the board and write one by one.
32
- Correct mistakes if necessary Key:
1.The boy is on the table.
2.The dog is in front of the kennel.
3.The cat is between the bookshelf and the
sofa.
4.The cat is behind the computer.
5.The girl is in the armchair.
6.The boy is next to the armchair.
* exercise 3
? Name the furniture in the picture and its + a clock
amount + a desk
+ many books
+ a laptop
+ a poster
+ a small plant
-let ss compare their answers with their + a lamp...
partners. -give the way of using:
-ask students to complete sentences using There is / isn’t + singular nouns
there is / are / isn’t / aren’t There are / aren’t + plural nouns
-Ss do exercise individually then compare
their answer with their partners
-correct -go to the borad and write their answers.
* exercise 4
-Ask ss to turn the sentences in exercise 3
into questions with: Make questions abd answers:
Is there a.... ? -Is there a clock on the wall?
Are there ......? + Yes, there is.
-Are there two small plants in the corner?
+ No, there aren’t.
-remark and give marks -ss practice asking and answering.
* exercise 5 : Write six sentences to describe -Ss do exercise individually. If possible ,
your bedroom. ask ss to go to the board and write their
-correct if necessary. answers.
* Communication
-ask ss to draw a cat in the house in the -ss read the sample of dialogue.
book. Ask antoher st to ask questions to find -draw a cat the work in groups.
the cat.
-model the way to ask and answer. -practice asking and answering( focus on
33
-go around and observe ss working. using prepositions of place )
-correct if necessary
C. HOMEWORK. -Learn by heart new words.
-Asign home work. -Prepare new lesson: Unit 3– Getting
Started.

Adjustments:
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Ngày soạn : 18 / 9/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 28 / 09/ 2016
Period 19: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 4: Skills 1
I. Objectives
- Reading the advertisement and Phuc’s e-mail to understand The superb summer camp.
- Training reading and speaking skills.
II.Teaching aids: - Poster
III. teaching steps

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

A. OLD LESSON.
- T calls 2 Ss to tell about their “Describe about your friend”
friends.

-Present some new words. B. NEW LESSON

-Ss repeat and copy them. I. READING
1. Vocabulary
-Check ROR.
- superb (a): tuyệt vời
- last (v): kéo dài
- attach (v): dán (nhãn)
- campfire: đêm lửu trại
- treasure: châu báu, điều quý giá.
- butter: bơ

34
 - yet: vẫn chưa
2. Choose the best answer. (Ex 1)
-Ask Ss to read the advertisement 1. The camp is for kids aged between…….
and do ex 1. a. 6-9 b. 10-15 c. 18-19
-Explain any words that Ss do not 2. The camp is in the…….
know. a. sea b. city park c. mountains
3. The camp last for…..days.
a. three b. four c. five.

-Ss quickly look at the text then 3. Read and answer the questions.(Ex2)
answer the questions.
- Explain the features of e-mails: 1. Is the text a letter, an e-mail or a blog?
format, greeting, ending. 2. What is the text about?
3. Is Phuc enjoying himself ?
Key: 1. an e-mail
2. A stay at Superb summer Camp.
3. Yes, he is.
4.Read the text again then write T or F(Ex3)
- Ss read the text again and decide 1. Phuc is writing to his teacher.
T or F 2. Phuc has four new friends.
3. Phuc thinks Nhung is kind.
- Ss do the activity 4 then compare
their answers with the partner. 4. Phuc likes scary stories.
5. In the evening, the kids are playing inside.
6. They are working on a milk farm tomorrow.
7. The children can speak Vnamese at the camp.
Key: 1. F ( he’s writing to his parents) 2. F (He
has three)
- T checks the answers
4. F (He hopes it isn’t too scary)
5. F (They are having a campfire and telling
stories)
6. F ( They are visiting a milk farm)
7. F ( They speak E only)
II. SPEAKING.
35
-Ask Ss to make their own schedule * Make your own English camp schedule
then report their results to the class.
Morning Afternoon
Day one
Day two
Day three
-Summarize the main point of the Home work
lesson. - Learn by heart new vocab.
-Assign home work. -Do exercises in work book.
-Prepare new lesson- Skill 2.
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………………….......................
Ngày soạn : 25 / 09 / 2016
Ngày dạy: 03 / 10 / 2016
Period 20: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 5: Skills 2

I. Objectives
- Listening to understand more about The Superb Summer Camp.
- Writing a plan for 4 Teen magazine.
II. Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

A. WARM-UP: Network
- Ss work in 2 teams. “Activities in a summer camp.”
- Check and correct - taking part in cooking competition
- Doing “treasure hunt”
- Playing traditional games.
-….
B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
Pre 1. Vocabulary
-Present some new words. - hike : đi bộ đường dài
- ski: trượt tuyết
- research (v): nghiên cứu
- draft (v): viết nháp
- check (v): kiểm tra
- introduce (v): giơi thiệu
-Ask Ss to look at the photos to match the 2. Prediction. (Ex1)
36
words in the box.
3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
While a. hiking
b. taking part in the cooking competition.
-Play the recording for checking and c. skiing
practicing reading the words. d. visiting a milk farm.
e. taking part in an art workshop.
f. riding a bike.
g. taking a public speaking class.
h. playing beach volleyball.
i. playing traditional games.
4. Listen to Mr Lee then complete
the table.
-Play the recording twice. Morning Afternoon
- Ss listen then fill in the table. Share their Day Two Doing a Visiting a
ideas together. treasure hunt milk farm
- Play the recording the final time then and..(1)....
check their answers. Day Three ........(2)......... .......(3)........
Key:
1. taking a public speaking class
2. Taking part in the “Kids Cook” contest.
3. Having a pool party.

II. Writing.
1. Study Skills.
-Tell the class three letters can help them Research, draft, check
to write better: R-D-C. Research: Make notes and brainstorm ideas.
-Hang the poster on the board. Find or draw pictures to add to your writing.
Draft: Then write the first draft.
-Ss study the Study Skills and may ask Check: Check your draft. Can you improve
some information. it? Write it out again.
2. Practice.
* Activity 4
-Ask Ss to use the notes below and then + Introduce yourself;
guide them how to write a plan for this Decribe yourself – think about your
weekend with their friends. appearance and personality.
+ Describe your friends
Write about your friends – think about the
appearance and personality.
-Ss write their plans. + Describe your plans:
- Go around and Correct some What do you plan to do together this
weekend?
37
 C. HOMEWORK
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Learn by heart new words
-Assign home work. -Finish the plans at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
……………………………………………………………………………………………....................

Ngày soạn : 30 / 9/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 06 / 10/ 2016

Period 21: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS

Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK

I. Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review adjectives of personality and the
grammar points: present continuous for future.
* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. Teaching steps

Teacher & Students Board & contents

A. WARM-UP.
-Have Ss work in 3 teams.
-Ss write as many words as possible.
[ B. NEW LESSON.
II. Grammar
- Ss look at the pictures and do this exercises * Activity 2 (individual)
T asks some Ss to write the sentences on the KEY:
board 1.The boy is on the table
- T checks Ss’s answers . 2.The dog is in front of the kennel
3.The cat is between the bookshelf and the
sofa
4.The cat is behind the computer
5.The girl is in the armchair
6.The boy is next to the armchair
-Ss do this exercise individually then *Activity 3.
compare their answers with a partner KEY :

38
T checks Ss’s answers 1 there is 2. There are

3. There is 4. There aren’t

-Ss do this exercise individually then 5. There is
compare their answers with a partner There aren’t
T checks Ss’s answers * Activity 4
1. Is there a clock on the wall?
2. Are there books on the bookshelf?
-Ss do this exercise individually then 3. ………………………………?
compare their answers with a partner *Activity 5.
T checks Ss’s answers Eg:
-There is a big clock on the wall.
-There are two pictures beside the clock.
-T models the way to to ask and answer with -…..
a student , then divide Ss into groups . Ss
work in group and take turn to draw a cat in III. Communication
the house in the book . Other students ask Eg:
questions to find the cat A: Where is the cat?
T goes around to observe Ss working , B: Is it on the bed?
correct their mistakes and discuss them with A: No, it isn’t.
the whole class . C: Is it under the table?
B: Yes, it is.
C. PROJECT
- One of the Ss in the group asks other group
members question 1 and fills the information *Activity 1 :
in the following table
1. Which house do you want to live ?
Why ?
House A B C D
-This Student then summarizes their group Name
members’ answers and reports the results to Reasons
the whole class *Activity 2 :
- Ss draw their own crazy house and tell the
group about their house . Alternatively , each
group can draw a crazy house together then
tell the class about their house . The class
vote for the best crazy house . If there is no
time left , this part can be done at home as
homework
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. D. HOMEWORK.
-Asign home work. -Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 3 – Getting
39
 Started.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
……………………………………………………………………………………………....................

Ngày soạn : 01 / 10 / 2016

Ngày dạy: 14 / 10/ 2016

Period 22+23: Review 1

I. Objectives

- Revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practised since unit 1.
II. Teaching aids:
textbook, cassette.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

I. Pronunciation:
- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final-
s/es. * Key :
Ex 1: 1D 2C 3C 4A 5B
- Ss do Ex 1 individually then share their
answers with a partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board to write the
answer.
- T corrects and give the correct answers.
Ex 2:
- T holds a game. Asks Ss to find the name of
school things and furniture in the house
which begin with / b /and / p / ( in pairs ). The
pair that finds the most words will go to the
board and write their answers . / b / : book, bag, bed ......
- Asks other to add any more words. / p / pen, pencil, picture, ...
40
II. Vocabulary:
EX 3 :
- Ss do ex 3 individually
- Asks Ss to share their answers with a
partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board and write 1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
down the answers. 5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
- Checks Ss’answers and give the correct - Play: sports, badminton
answers. - Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.

Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom

EX 4: Crossword puzzle 5. apartment 6. porter
- Ss work in pairs to do the crossword. Down : 2. dining room 4. hall

Ex 5: Choose the correct words. 1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working

- Asks Ss to do ex5 individually. 4. patient 5. sporty.
- Ss give the correct answers.
- T corrects and give correct answers

III. Grammar :
- Elicits the use of the present simple and the
present continuous.
1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not
Ex 6: going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping
- Asks Ss to do ex6. 5.is
- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board,
others do it on their notebook.
- Checks Ss’ answers

Ex 7: 1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have 4. is

- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention 5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is
to the hints, do exercise individuallyand
compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss’ answers and gives the correct
answers.

Ex 8:
- Ss work in pairs to do ex8
41
- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

Ex9: 6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4
- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.
- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the
conversation
Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B
IV. Skills: Ex 2 : 1. it’s in a quiet place not far from....
1. Reading: 2. They’re hard-working and serious.
- Ss do ex1,2 individually. .............
- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

2. Speaking:
- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews
the other two about what they like and
dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members’ answers in
the table and report them to the class, then
summerises Ss’ideas.

3. Listening :
Ex 4 :
- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen kitchen – garden – living room – bedroom.
- Play the recording again for Ss to check
their answers.
- Asks Ss to give their answers
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
Ex 5:
- Ss read the questions quickly. 1. She’s watering the plants in the garden.
- T plays the recording again and answer the 2. He’s listening to the radio
questions 3. He’s inMi’s bedroom.
- Ss compare their answers with a partner. 4. She’s watching TV.
- Give feedback and correct answers.

4. Writing:
- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.
- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
42
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail
on the board - Write homework on their notebook.
- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
* Homework :
- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the test 1.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
Ngày soạn : 10 / 10 / 2016
Ngày ktra: 17 / 10/ 2016

Period 24: Test 1

I. Mục đích yêu cầu:

1. Đọc hiểu :
Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng sai, trả lời câu hỏi dựa vào nội dung bài học.
2. Viết:
Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
3. Nghe :
Nghe đoạn văn chọn đáp án đúng / sai theo nội dung bài nghe.
4. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :
Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.
II. Chuẩn bị :
Bài photo.
III. Ma trận :

Cấp độ tư duy Tổng

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Language Pho 4 4
1.0 1.0
focus Vocab 6 6
3.0 3.0
Gram 4 4
2.0 2.0
Reading 4 4
1.0 1.0
43
Writing 4 4
2.0 2.0
Listening 4 4
1.0 1.0
Tổng 10 12 4 26
4.0 4.0 2.0 10.

IV. Đề bài :
A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:
Question 1: Which underlined part is pronouced differrently in each line? Choose and
circle A,B,C or D. ( 1p )
1. A. go B. post C. come D. hope
2. A. beds B. dogs C. porters D. books
3. A. pictures B. watches C. buses D. toothbrushes
4. A. homework B. mother C. open D. judo
Question 2: Choose the best answer.( 3ps )
1. Kitchen is a …… in a house.
A. furniture B. room C. building
2. A clock is ……. the wall.
A. in B. at C. on
3. I ……. football every afternoon.
A. play B. do C. have
4. What’s your favourite ……. , Nam ? - Music.
A. food B. subject C. drink
5. Hai is very ……. . She always on the phone, chatting to friends.
A. talkative B. shy C. kind
6. …….. my shoes ? - They’re under the bed.
A. what B. How C. Where
B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN :
Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 2ps)
1. She ( speak ) ……………… English very well.
2. What ……………you ( do) …………… now ? - I ( read ) ……………… book.
3. They ( not go ) ……………………. to the theater this evening.
Question 2: Read the text.( 1p)
She’s Nga. She lives in a country house with her parents and sister . Her house is not very
big. There are 6 rooms in her house : a living room, three bedrooms, a bathroom and a
kitchen. Her bedroom is between her parents’ room and the kitchen. It’s small but she likes it.
44
A. Read the text again and write True (T) or false (F).( 6B )
1. Nga lives in a town.
2. She lives with her grandparents.
3. Her house isn’t very big.
4. Her bedroom is next to the bathroom.
B. Answer the following questions: ( 6A )
1. Where does Nga live ?
2. How many rooms are there in her house?
3. Is her house is very small ?
4. Does she like her house ?
Question 3: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 2ps )
1. is / in / there / sofa / front / a / you / of .
2. you / the / door / can / please / open ?
3. there / bookshelf / the / are / on / books ?
4. go / with / like / out / you / to / me / would ?
Question 4 : Listen and write True (T) or false (F) ( 1p )
Hi. My name is Susie Brewer. I’m eleven years old. I’m now in grade 6 at PLC Sysney. I like
it here, as I like to study in girl’s school. The teacher at my school are nice and very helpful,
and my favourite teacher is Mrs Susan McKeith. She teaches us maths. I have three hours to
study Vietnamese in the afternoon. Usually I do my homework at breaktime. We wear our
uniform everyday,but today we aren’t, as we are going to have an outing to Taronga Zoo.
1. Susie Brewer is 11 years old.
2. Now She is in grade 8.
3. She has three hours to study English in the afternoon.
4. She does her homework at breaktime.
V. Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:

A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :

Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:
Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
45
 3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1T 2F 3F 4T
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
Ngày soạn : 14/ 10/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 21/ 10/ 2016
Period 25: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 1: Getting Started
Lost in the old town
I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can
- Know some vocabulary about places, derections
- Use suguestions
- Read for specific information about good things in the neighbourhood
- Talk about different places and show directions to these in a neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
II. TEACHING STEPS.
Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board
- Look through the picture and remember I. Warm up:
some things in it Kim's game ( 2 groups)
Pre - teach II. New lesson.
A. Getting Started.
-Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss about 1. Vocabulary:
the picture
- excited (a): phấn chấn, khơch ứng
Where are Nick , Khang and Phong?
- exciting (a): thỳ vị, hứng thỳ, kơch ứng
What might be happening to them? What
are they doing? - historic (a): cổ kơn,cổ

-Have you ever got lost? Where and when? - lost (a): lạc, bị lạc
How did you feel then? What did you do? - memorial (n): Đài tưởng niệm

- Elicits the new words using pictures and - cathedral (n) : Nhà thờ lơn
46
explaination
+ Check vocabulary : R O R
-Play the recording. Ss listen and 2. Listen and read:
read.Pause the recording at the appropriate
places if Ss need with comprehension
questions. 1a: Read and put the actions in order
-Ss work independently. Allow them to KEY: 2 5 3 4 1 6
share answers before discussing as a class. 1b: Making suggestions. Put the words
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation in the correcct order.
to find the phrases. Practice saying them KEY: 1.a.Where shall we go first?
together( play the recording again as a b. Let's go to " Chua cau"
model if necessary) 2.a. Shall we go by bicycle?
b. Ok, sure.
3.a.Shall we go by bicycle?
_ First, model the role- play with a more b. No, let's walk there.
able St. Then ask pairs to role- play the Form: Shall we vinf....
short conversations before demonstrating Let's
the class. Practice:2Role play making suggestions
3. Match the places below with the
pictures. Then listen, check and repeat
the works.
1 E- Square: Quảng trường
-Ss work in groups.Ss match the picture 2H -palace: Cung điện
with the places 3 F -cathedral: Nhà thờ lơn
- Correct. 4C -memorial: Đài tưởng niệm
5 G- art gallery: Triển lóm tranh
6 A- statue: Tượng
7 B -railway station: Ga tàu
8D- temple: Miếu thờ
-First, model this activities with a more 4. Think about where you live
able Ss. Ask Ss to work in pairs. Call some Ex: A: Is there a theatre in your
pairs to practise in front of the class. neighbourhood?
B: Yes, There is/ No, There isn't
5. Match the instructions in the box
_ Have Ss quickly match each instruction with the pictures.
with the diagram. Check their answer. 1. Go straing on. 2.turn left at traffic
Translation ( weak student) lights. 3. Go past the bus stop. 4.Take the
Ask some additional questions( strong first turning on the left./Take the first left.
Students) 5.Go to the end of the roard. 6 Go along
the street. 7 Cross the street.
6. Game : Give your partner directions
47
 to one of the places on the map, guess
then swap
- Demonstrate the game to the class first. EX; A : Go straight. Take the second
Ask a more able S to help. Then Ss play in turning on theleft. It's on your right.
pairs B: Is that the art gallery?
A: Yes,it is/ No, try again
-Sumarize and review the lesson. III. Home work.
-Prepare closer look 1. Learn the new words + Do exercises
-Prepare closer look 1.
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 15/ 10/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 22/ 10/ 2016
Period 26: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 2: A closer look1

I. TEACHING POINTS
By the end of the lesson, Ss can:
- use vocabulary and structures about people and places ( adjectives opposite)
- pronounce 2 sounds: /i:/ and /i/
II. Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. Warm up:
- Decribe the pictures using adjectives 2 groups: Write the words as much as
possible.
II. New lesson.
A. Vocabulary.
- Elicits the new words using pictures and - narrow(a): hẹp >< wide
explaination - Fantastic : tuyệt vời, tuyệt diệu
- convenient: tiện lợi
- polluted: bị ô nhiểm
-peaceful: yên bình, thanh tĩnh
1. Fill in each blank with one word
+ Check vocabulary : practice saying the
from the box. Listen then check, repeat
adjectives with Ss. Then ask Ss to write
the words.
the correct adjectives in the blanks. Play
the 2. convenient 3.boring 4.polluted. 5.

48
 record as many times as reqired to allow historic 6.narrow 7. noisy
them to check their answers , support their 2. " Watch Out": Sometimes words can
pronunciation. have two or more opposites: noisy-
- Explain the contents in " Watch out!" quiet/ peaceful. some words don't have
carefully to the Ss. T may take some more opposite : polluted
examples to illustrate. Ask Ss to do the KEY: boring-exciting; historic-modern
vocabulary exercise individually. Check noisy- quiet/peaceful. convenient-
with the whole class. When checking, ask inconvenient; fantastic-terrible.
Ss to refer to 1 to make the meanings of
the opposites clearer to them 3.Work in pair.......
Ex: A: Is your neighbourhood polluted?
First model this activity with a more able B: No, it isn't
S. Remind Ss that they only use the A: Is it peaceful?
adjectives they have learnt in 1 and 2 to B: Yes, it is
talk about their village, town or city.Then
Ss works in pairs. Call some pairs to
practise in front of class.
B. Pronuciation
/i:/ and /i/
4. Listen and repeat.
- T asks some Ss to read out the words first exciting cheap historic sleepy
, then plays the recording for them to listen expensive convenient peaceful police
and repeat the words. noisy friendly

- Ss listen and distinguish /i:/ and /i/ /i:/ /i/

cheap sleep historic exciting
peaceful expensive noisy
convenient police friendly

5. Listen then circle the words you hear.

- T asks Ss to circle the words while they Key.
listen . 1. living 7. teams
- Ss compare their answers in pairs before 2. heat 8. chip
T checks their answers with the whole 3. seats
class 4. sheep
5. tins
6. mill
-Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat 6. Listen and repeat the chant. Notice
sentence by sentence. Help them to the sounds /i:/ and /i/.
recognize the sounds and the rhythm.
-Ss practise the chant by dividing the class
49
into two groups.
Have groups sing alternate lines

III. Home work.

-Summarize the main points of the lesson.. Learn the new words
-Review the lesson.
-Prepare closer look 2.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 19/ 10/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 26/ 10/ 2016
Period 27: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 3: A closer look2

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can focus on comparative adjective forms
II. Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
II. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. Warm up:
- Decribe the pictures using adjectives 2 groups: Write the words as much as
possible.
T introduces the subject of the lesson : II. New lesson.
comparative adjectives and give the rule. A. Grammar
* Short adjectives: one or two syllable(s)
S1 + V + adj + er than + S2
( fast- faster; large- larger; noisy- noisier;
hot- hotter)
* Long adjectives: two, three or more
syllables
S1 + V + more adj + than + S2
50
 ( modern- more modern; expensive- more
expensive...)
REMEMBER;: Irregular adjectives
- good/ well  better ; bad  worse
- many / much  more little less
- far farther / further
B.Practice:
1. Complete the following sentences
with the comparative form of the
Ask Ss to read the instructions. Tell Ss adjectives in th brackets.
what they should do. Then have Ss KEY: 2. taller 3. bigger 4. noisier
compair 5.cheaper
their answers in pairs before checking with
the whole class. 2 Now complete the following sentences
- Ask Ss to read the instructions. Use the with the comparative form of the long
example to show ss what should do. Then adjectives in brackets
have Ss compair their answers in pairs KEY: 2 more beautiful 3. more convinient
before checking with the whole class. 4. more interesting 5 more expensive.

3. Read and complete Vy's letter to her

- Ask Ss to read and complete the friend.
sentences individually. remind them to pay KEY: 1 drier 2 smaller 3 older 4 wider
attention to the number of the syllables in 5 more delicious
each adjective. Compare their answers in 6 cheaper
pairs before checking with the whole class. 4. Look at the pictures of Yen Binh
neighbourhood and LangSon
- T elitcits . Write sentences compare the neighbourhood . Now write about the
two the neighbourhood. Compare in differences.
pairs .then saying to the whole class. Ex: Yen Binh is more crowed than Lang
- Feedback. Son.
5.Complete the following sentences with
the comparative form of the adjectives
Ask Ss to read the instructions. Use the in brackets
example to show ss what should do. Then KEY: 2 more expensive
have Ss compair their answers in pairs 3 more comfortable
before checking with the whole class 4 more historic 5 narrower
6.Work in pairs. .....
EX: A: Is Yen Binh more crowded than
-First model this activity with a more able Lang Son?
S. Remind Ss that they only use the B: Yes, It is
information they have written in 4 to ask A: Is Lang Son more modern than Yen
51
and answer questions about the two Binh?
neighbourhood.Then Ss works in pairs. B: No, it isn't.
Call some pairs to practise in front of 7. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the
class. places that you know...
- Ask Ss think of the places that they've Ex: Is Hue busier than Da Nang?
been to.Model this activity with a more No , it isn't
able St.Then Ss works in pairs. T goes
around the class and monitors. Ask a few
pairs with the most imaginative ideas to
report them to the class.
III. Home work.
-Summarize the main points of the lesson.. Learn the new words
-Review the lesson.
-Prepare comunication.
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 21/ 10/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 28/ 10/ 2016
Period 28: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 4: Comunication
I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- Listen for specific information about directions to some places in a neighbourhood.
- Talk about different places, use connective words and some expressions to give
directions to these places in the neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.
Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board
I. Warm up:
Brainstorming
T: Show pictures to teach new words. Cao lầu Many
Ss: Have a look at the pictures and guess old houses
the meanings of thhe new words. Hoi An
-Ask Ss to write anything they know about Chùa Cầu
Hoi An. World
heritage An ancient town
II. New lesson.
52
- give some new words. 1/ New words:
- first : trươc tiên
- then : tiếp theo , rồi thì…
- after that : sau đó
- finally : cuối cùng
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R - to guide : hương dẫn
- be famous for : nỗi tiếng về
Play the recording. First,Ss to listen only. - direction (n): phương hương
- Play the recording again and allow Ss to - Sa Huynh Culture:nền văn hóa Sa Huỳnh
fill in the gaps as they listen. 2/ Act1: Listen and fill in the gaps.
- Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs,
before playing the recording a final time to 1. historic 2. covenient 3 straight 4 second
allow the pairs to check their answers. 5.left 6 right 7 second 8 next to.
- Ask Ss to read the audio guide again,
paying attention to the use of the
connective words: first(ly), second(ly),
then and finally
Ask Ss to read the brief information about 3/Act 2: Create an audio guide for a city
London and Ho Chi Minh City and look instructions carefully.
carefully at the two simplified maps of the
two cities.
- Elicit additional information about the
two cities from Ss, then ask Ss to read the
- Ask Ss some more questions to check if
they know what they are supposed to do.
- Remind Ss of the expressions they can Ho Chi Minh City
use to give directions. ( Ss may refer to
the expressions in the dialogue and
exercise 5 of Getting started.)
- Have Ss prepare their audio guide
individually and then share it with
apartner.
- Ask Ss to practice presenting their audio London
guide in pairs or in groups. 4/ Act 3:Create an audio guide for Da
Nang City.
Give the city fact file:DNCity: one of the
largest cities in VN; on the river Han,
53
 Ngu Hanh Son Mountains, wide and clean
- Elicit information about Da Nang from streets, many beautiful beaches& bridges.
Ss.

- Ask Ss to prepare their audio guide

individually and then share it with partner.

- Have Ss present their audio guide to the

class.
III. Home work.
-Summarize the main points of the lesson.. - Learn the new words
- Write the audio guide into your notebook
-Review the lesson & prepare skill 1.
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 22/ 10/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 29/ 10/ 2016
Period 29: Test correction
I. Nhận xét bài làm của học sinh.
II. Đưa ra đáp án .
A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :
Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:
Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.
54
Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1T 2F 3F 4T

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 22/ 10/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 2/ 11/ 2016
Period 30: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 4: Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:

By the end of the lesson, Ss can :

- read a blog for specific information about good things and bad things in a neighbourhood.

- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .

II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.

III. TEACHING STEPS.
Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board
- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang’s I. warm up
neighbourhood is?
What do you think about it? Ss look at the picture of Khang’s
neighbourhood. Answer individually'
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?
- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these II. New lesson
words in the pasage.
A. Reading:
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of
the words in the context. 1. Vocabulary:

Suburb (n): ngoại ô

55
 Backyard (n): sân sau

Incredibly (adj): vô cùng, thật ngạc nhiên

T asks Ss to read the text again and answer Beach (n): bãi biển
the questions.
(to) dislike: không thích
-T asks Ss to note where they found the
information that helped them to answer the 2. Anwer the questions:
questions.
* Key:
-Ss can compare their answers with their
partners. 1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang

-T corrects the answers: 2/ Because it has beautiful parks and

sandy beaches and fine weather.

3/ They are very friendly.

4/ Because there’re many modern

_ Ss scan the passage again and find the buildings and offices in the city.
information to complete the table.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
_ Ss note where they found the
information and compare with their
partners. Like
- It’s great for outdoor activities.
_ Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
- There’s almost everything here.
_ T checks and corrects it
- Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.

- People are incredibly friendly.

- The food is very good.

B. Speaking:

4/ Look at the map of Khang’s

neighbourhood and give directions:

Directions:
T reviews the expressions they can use to

56
give directions. 1. Go straight on

2. Turn left ...

3. Go past…

4. Take the first

5. Go to the end

6. Go along

7. Cross

T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and T: Can you tell us the way to the
answering questions about the locations on market?
the map.
S1: First, go along Cu Chinh Lan street.
-T may model this activity with a good Then take the second turning on the left.
student.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class After that go straight . It’s on your left.

-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue. 5/ Ask and answer questions about the
way to get to the places in your city.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their
dialogues in front of the class.
Summarize the main point of the lesson. Homework:
-Assign home work.
-Practice reading comprehension a blog.

Review the lesson.

-Prepare skill 2.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

57
 Ngày soạn : 28/ 10/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 4/ 11/ 2016
Period 31: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the conversation between a stranger and Duy' Dad
- Writing a paragraph about what SS like or dislike their neighbour hood.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams. A. WARM-UP: Network
- Check and correct “Decribe your neighbourhood"

B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
Pre 1. Vocabulary
-Present some new words. super market: siêu thị
cafe': cà phê
secondary school: trường cấp 2
lower secondary school : trường cấp 1
sandy: cát
office: văn phòng, cơ quan

-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the 2. Prediction. (Ex1)

missing words.(EX1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map
carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get
the places mumbered 1-4 from the You
are here point.( Ex2)
While 3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
-Play the recording for checking and 1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
completing the missing words in the 4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school
dialogue.
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers. EX2.Choose the correct places
Share their ideas together. 1.A 2C 3F 4D
- Play the recording the final time then
58
check their answers.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't
-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like like about a neighbourhood.
about a neighbourhood. 1. sandy beaches
-Hang the poster on the board. 2.heavy tracffice......
- Share their answers with partners 8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or * Activity 4. Make notes about your
dislike about living in their neighbourhood, think about the things you
neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full like or dislike about it
sentences and they can use abbreviations Like Dislike
Share with their partners. T may read out
the notes from some more able Ss to the
whole class. * Act 5: Write a paragragh about your
neighbourhood saying what you like or dis
- Set up the writing activity.Use their like about living there. Use the information
ideas in 4, and Khang'blog as a model.
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm I'd like to tell you some good things and some
for language necessary for writing. bad things about living in my neighbourhood.
? Write the first draft.then have them
write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the
wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T
comments.
C. HOMEWORK
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
-Assign home work. Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

59
 Ngày soạn : 29/ 10/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 5/ 11/ 2016
Period 32: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project
I. TEACHING POINTS:

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.

- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.

- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.

II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.

III. TEACHING STEPS
Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board
I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
them repeat the words. Check their 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for B. Grammar
them to choose the correct adjectives.  Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually fast happy exciting
first. then they can check their answers with hot noisy expensive
a partner before discussing the answers as a large quiet convenient
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of heavy difficult
their original answers so they can polluted
use that information in their Now you  Activity 4 KEY
can......statements. adj comparative form

60
-T elicits the language being practiced in thisfast faster
activity convenient more convenient
noisy noisier
difficult more difficult
heavy heavier
expensive more expensive
happy happier
hot hotter
polluted more polluted
exciting more exciting
large larger
quiet quieter
 Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
-Ss read the questions and answer once or 5 more expensive than
twice( they read them aloud). Then match C. Communication
them. If there is time, have them write their :*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
notebooks. :*Activity 7.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions Finished! Now you can..
and answers . . name places
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self . give directions
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .use adjective to
areas and provide further practice. describe places.
.compare things
-T ask ss look at the picture of two D. Project
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the What is your ideal neighbourhood?
tipical features of them. 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood.
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their 2. write a description of it.
imagination.( if have time) - where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the
weather ..is/ are?
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK.
-Assign home work. -Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.
Adjustments:
61
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 2/ 11/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 9/ 11/ 2016
Period 33: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of the netural and describe them
+/ Making and
+ Making and responding to a suggestion.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-Before Ss open their books, review the
previous Unit focus on the key language Ask Ss questions about the picture
and structures learnt. eg: How many people are there?
- Write the unit title on the board What are they doing?
“geography club ” explain the meaning of
surprise and asks Ss to guess what the
picture might be about . Let Ss open their
books and check their answers.
2. Presentation.
- T can also Ss to share any recent 1. Listen and read.
experiences of going on a picnic. */ New words.
Play the recording - desert | dɪˈzɜːt |
ss listen and read. - waterfall | ˈwɔːtəfɔːl |
3. Practice. - valley | ˈvæli |
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation - island | ˈaɪlənd |
to find the phrases
- Practice saying them together a Answer the following questions
- Pay attention to intonation when asking 1- Vy is
questions 2- She went to the wrong room
- Ask pairs to role-play the short 3- Uluru
62
 conversations before demonstrating for 4- Australia
the class 5- An island
- Demonstrate the game to the class first. b.Classroomlanguage
1- Can you spell that ,please?
2- Can you repeat that .please
3- Can I come in.?
c.Brainstorm situations whenpeople
use these sentences.Then role-play the
situations with a partner.
2. Listen and repeat the following
- Ask Ss label the pictures. words
1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
- T asks Ss to read the conversation in 1 4- forest 5- cave 6- desert
again . tick the words you can find. 7- lake 8- beach 9- island
10- valley
4. Production.
-Guide the way to do . 3. Now label the pictures.
- Ss can present their flowers to class or 1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
make a display of the flowers on a 4- forest 5 cave 6- desert
noticeboard. 7- lake 8- beach
5. Home work. 9- island 10- valley
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson. 4. Read the conversation in 1 again .
tick the words you can find.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

63
 Ngày soạn : 5/ 11/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 12/ 11/ 2016
Period 34: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of travel items
+/ Pronunciation /t/ and /st/
+/ New words: - plaster, walking boots, painkillers, sun cream, scissors, sleeping bag,
backpack
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new - Bring some travel items

lesson. ex: raincoat, umbrella backpack.....
-vocabulary
Travel items 1. Match theitems with the pictures then
- Discuss some of the placesin the practise saying the following items .
previous : */ New words.
desert, mountain..... - plaster | ˈplɑːstə |
- Do I need a backpack in the desert? - painkillers | ˈpeɪnkɪlə |
- Why do you think so? - sun cream | sʌn kriːm |
- scissors | ˈsɪzəz |
2. Presentation. - sleeping bag | ˈsliːpɪŋ bæɡ |
- backpack | ˈbækpæk |
Ss listen and read.
1. Match theitems with the pictures then
3. Practice. practise saying the following items .
- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with 1- painkillers
Ss. 2- scissors
3- plaster
- Read and act out the sentences for Ss. 4- sun cream
64
- Clicit ideas for sentense1. 5- sleeping bag
- Then allow ss to complete the remaining 6- walking boots
sentences. 7- backpack
-Check their ideas at the end. 8- compass

- Remind ss that in the introduce they 2.Complete the following sentenses

thought about useful things for a 1- compass
beach,desert , mountain... 2- sun cream
-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday 3- painkills
and they need to order the otems from 4- backpack
very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8) 5- plaster
3. Now put the items in order . Number 1
- Practice sounding out the sound is most useful on holiday . Number 8 is
/t/ and /st/ together the least useful.
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to
number the words in the order they hear they are going on a beach holiday
them. they need.......
- Play the recroding again
4.Listen and number the words you hear.
4. Production. best, boat, coast, lost, boot , desert.plaster.
-Guide the way to do . forest
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a 5. Listen again and repeat the words.
noticeboard.
6. Listen and repeat .Pay attention to the
bold-typed parts of the words.
- Listen and repeat

5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

65
 Ngày soạn : 9/ 11/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 16/ 11/ 2016
Period 35: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use comparative and superlative
adjectives, notice the pronunciation of comparative and superlative adjectives.
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: can, can’t, must, mustn’t, should, should.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson. */ Brainstorming.

- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :
List the famous places which the Ss know.
2. Presentation. - Ha Long bay, Da Lat city, Sapa,…
- T can give some famous places and asks
some questions about Mount everest, Tra Co
beach, Amazon river…
3. Practice. 1.Vy is going to a quiz about wonders of
- Choose a more able St to act as Vy, and the world.Read the sentences and guess if
read the sentences to the class. they are true or false.
- Ss tick True(T) or False(F) in the box
provided.
- T asks Ss to stand up if they think the
sentence is True , or remain seated if they
think the sentence is False. 2.Listen to Vy giving the answer to the
qiuz . check your guesses.
- Play the recording and allow Ss to check Keys: 1.T 2.T 3.F
their answers. 4.T 5.T 6.T
3. Underline all the words ending in – est
- Ask Ss to lookback at Vy’s sentences, find in the quiz.
66
and underline all the examples of –est. 1. Mount everest is the highest mountain in
the world.

2. Ba Be lake is the largest lake inVietNam.

…
4.Complete the table with the
comparative and superlative adjectives

good better Best

bad worse The best
tall taller …
long … …
wide
large
hot
- T asks all the students in the class do on
their bokks, except only one who go to the 5. Now Vy is talking about other amazing
board and do. places. Complete the passage..
- Then T corrects if they do wrongly. 1- hottest 2- hotter 3- coldest
4- coldest 5- colder 6- bigger
7- highest 8- smaller
- T give the pieces of paper, and asks Ss to 6. Cut up some pieces of paper. Write the
work in groups and make sentences about the names of some famous places on them.
place. - eg:
West Lake

- T writes the example on the board , then

guides the way to do. “West Lake is the largest lake in HN”
- T can go arround the class and help the
week students how to do.
4. Production. 7. Vy givingMai some feedback . read and
-Guide the way to do . underline the forms of must.
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard. 8 .Look at the classroom rules below.
5. Home work. Write....
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the
new lesson.

Adjustment:

67
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 11/ 11/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 18/ 11/ 2016
Period 36: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn’t.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip
to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in
the book at page 53 to ask some questions - Where are they? What are they doing?
and the Ss answer. - Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
2. Presentation. */ Newwords.
- T writes the newwords on the board and - tent | tent |
asks Ss to read all the newwords to check - waterproof coat | ˈwɔːtəpruːf kəʊt |
the pronunciation . - sun hat | sʌn hæt |
- diverse | daɪˈvɜːs |
3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the 2.Now make a list of the things must
travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls take to the Himalayas. then add things
some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry. you mustn’t take.

- One student stands up and read the title Must mustn’t

of activity 1. An other translates it into compass shorts
Vietnamese what they are going to do. sun cream t- shirt
painkills
68
- Ask Ss to use information in the text and backpack
their own ideas to fill in the “ must ” and “ plaster
mustn’t ” columns.

3. Role-play being a tour guide and a

tourist.Tell your partner what to
- Create your own list and demonstrate the prepare for their trip to the
activity with a more able Ss Himalayas.Try to give reasons
- Then ask the class to complete the role-
play What to prepare for their trip to the
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class. Himalayas.
- Compass
- Check their ideas at the end - sun cream
- Painkills
- Backpack
Modal verbs - plaster
Must + V Example:
You must be careful in the garden A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK I think you must take a waterproof
- T asks them to work in open pairs to coat. It is the highest mountain in the
practice roling a play. world. It’s cold and rainy there!
A: Yes. Anything else?
4. Production. B: …
- Guide the way to do . 4. Perform your Role-play for the class
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

69
 Ngày soạn : 16/ 11/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 23/ 11/ 2016
Period 37: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to know and understand the famous places
such as : Ha Long Bay and Hue City. .
- Review the comparatives and supperatives.
- Newwords: essential, traditional, central, attraction, cuisine.
- Skill: Reading.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson. 1. Where is the passage from?
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures at page 2. What is it about ?
54 and make predictions about the text. 3. What do you know about the subject?
1.Before you Read .Look at the picture
below and make prediction about the
text. Then read and check your ideas.
1- HaLong bay and Hue
2- places
3- I ...
2. Presentation. */ Newwords
- T writes the newwords on the - essential | ɪˈsenʃl |
blackboard.
- traditional | trəˈdɪʃnəl |
- central | ˈsentrəl |

70
3. Practice. - attraction | əˈtrækʃn |
- Ss read the newwords in chorus. Notice
the pronunciation. - cuisine | kwɪˈziːn |
- T corrects if they pronounce wrongly. 2. Find these words in the passages in 1 .
then check the meaning.
- Ask ss to find the four words in the
passages and underline them. Essential , activities , attaction , cuisine
- Check their meaning.
- Ask ss to read the sentences then write 3. Read the following sentenses.then
true or false . tickT or F
1. In HL Bay some of the island look like
people or animals.
1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F 5T
- Answer the following questions. 4. Now answer the following questions
- Then ask the class to complete the role- 1- HL Bay in Quang Ninh
play. 2. You must take a boat ride.
Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class. 3.A visit to the imperial City is more
important.
- Check their ideas at the end. 4.Bacause people travel there just for the
food.
SPEAKING
5. Work in pairs. Make notes about ona
of the places in the brochure. use the
- Discuss with Ss which things they find information in the text and your own
interesting /uninteresting about HL Bay ideas.
and Hue - Tuan Chau is the biggest island in HL
Bay
- VNese seafood
- Ask Ss to close their book - Traditional dance
divide ss into A and B. 6. Tell your partner about the place.
- Tell group A to describe HL Bay.
- Tell group B to describe Hue.
4. Production. 7. Your friends are visiting your town.
- Tell the class they are ivsiting in your Think about what they must and
hometown mustn’t do while they are there. role-
- Ask Ss to suggest some advice play the conversation in group.
- Use must /mustn’t a- Things they must do/bring:
5. Home work. b: Things they mustn’t do/bring:
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.

Adjustment:
71
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

===============================
Ngày soạn : 18/ 11/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 25/ 11/ 2016
Period 38: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what the Nick’s family are
talking in the travel agent and answer the questions.
- Write a travel guide about a place the students know.
- Skill: Listening and writing.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new
lesson. -Ask Ss to recall the two places in the
- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1
brochure in skills 1
HL Bay and Hue

2. Presentation. 1Nick’family are in the travel agent’s

.They want to go on holiday.They are
choosing a place from the brochure
above .which place do they choose?
3. Practice.
- Listen
- Ask Ss which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday - They go to HL BAy
destination
- Play the recording for the answer.
2. Listen again and answer the following
- Wok in pairs to ask and answer. questions.
1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha
Trang
72
 2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui
Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL
Bay?
3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is
more interesting.
4- Yes, he is

3. Write a travel guide about a place WRITING

you know 3. Write a travel guide about a place you
- Ask some questions to prepare the class know
for the activity - Do you have picture or can you draw a
map of the place?
- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other natural
wonders?
- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?

4. Production.
4. In notes , fill each blank in the
- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen network with the inforation about the
places place.Then use these notes to write a
-Check their ideas at the end short paragraph about it.

1 – where is it?
2- How far is it?
3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?
5. Home work. 5- What is special about it?
- Copy and learn the new words. 6- what can you do there?
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================

73
 Ngày soạn : 19/ 11/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 26/ 11/ 2016
Period 39: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. TEACHING POINTS:

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: superative form of short adjectives.

- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.

- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.

* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.

II. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
them repeat the words. Check their 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives. B. Grammar
 Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually fast happy exciting
first. then they can check their answers with hot noisy expensive
74
a partner before discussing the answers as a large quiet convenient
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of heavy difficult
their original answers so they can polluted
use that information in their Now you  Activity 4 KEY
can......statements. adj comparative form
fast faster
-T elicits the language being practiced in this convenient more convenient
activity noisy noisier
difficult more difficult
heavy heavier
expensive more expensive
happy happier
hot hotter
polluted more polluted
exciting more exciting
 Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
-Ss read the questions and answer once or :*Activity 6.
twice( they read them aloud). Then match KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
them. If there is time, have them write their :*Activity 7.
notebooks. Finished! Now you can..
. name places
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions . give directions
and answers . .use adjective to
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self describe places.
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .compare things
areas and provide further practice.
-T ask ss look at the picture of two D. Project
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the What is your ideal neighbourhood?
tipical features of them. 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood.
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their 2. write a description of it.
imagination.( if have time) - where it is / what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK.
-Assign home work. -Learn the new words.
-Compare some things in your school.
75
 -Make a description.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 19/ 11/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 26/ 11/ 2016

Period 39: Revision

I . Objectives:
- Ss revise what they have learnt in unit 4 and unit 5
II. Contents:
- Sounds / i: / and / I / ; / t / and / st /
- Comparative and superative adjectives.
- Modal verb: must
III. Procedures:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

I. Pronunciation:
- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final- /
i: / and / I / ; / t / and / st / * Key :
1D 2C 3C 4A 5B
III. Grammar :
- Elicits the use of the present simple and the
present continuous.
Ex 6:
- Asks Ss to do ex6.
- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board, / b / : book, bag, bed ......
others do it on their notebook. / p / pen, pencil, picture, ...
- Checks Ss’ answers
Ex 7:
- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention
to the hints, do exercise individuallyand 1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
compare their answers with a partner. 5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
- Checks Ss’ answers and gives the correct
answers.
Ex 8: - Play: sports, badminton
- Ss work in pairs to do ex8 - Have: lunch, a lesson
76
- One pair goes to the board and does this ex. - Do: homework, judo
- Gives feedback and correct answers. - Study: English, physics.

Ex9:
- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.
- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers. Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
- Calls one or two pairs act out the 5. apartment 6. porter
conversation Down : 2. dining room 4. hall
IV. Skills:
1. Reading:
- Ss do ex1,2 individually.
- Ss compare the answers with their partner. 1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working
- Gives feedback and correct answers. 4. patient 5. sporty.
2. Speaking:
- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews
the other two about what they like and
dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members’ answers in
the table and report them to the class, then
summerises Ss’ideas.
3. Listening : 1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not
Ex 4 : going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping
- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen 5.is
- Play the recording again for Ss to check
their answers.
- Asks Ss to give their answers
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
Ex 5: 1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have 4. is
- Ss read the questions quickly. 5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is
- T plays the recording again and answer the
questions 6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4
- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers. Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B
4. Writing:
- Elicits the parts of an e-mail. Ex 2 : 1. it’s in a quiet place not far from....
- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually. 2. They’re hard-working and serious.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board .............
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail
on the board
- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
* Homework :
77
- Redo the exercises at home. - Write homework on their notebook.
- Prepare for the test 2.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 26 / 11 / 2016

Ngày ktra: 2 / 12 / 2016

Period 41 : Test 2

I. Mục đích yêu cầu:

1. Đọc hiểu :
Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng sai, trả lời câu hỏi dựa vào nội dung bài học.
2. Viết:
Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
3. Nghe :
Nghe đoạn văn chọn đáp án đúng / sai theo nội dung bài nghe.
4. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :
Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.
II. Chuẩn bị :
Bài photo.
III. Ma trận :

Cấp độ tư duy Tổng

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Language Pho 4 4
1.0 1.0
focus Vocab 6 6
3.0 3.0
Gram 4 4
1.0 2.0
Reading 6 4
1.5 1.0
Writing 4 4
2.0 2.0
Listening 4 4
1.0 1.0
78
 Tổng 10 12 4 26
4.0 4.0 2.0 10.

IV. Đề bài :
A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:
Question 1: Circle the odd one out(1p)
1. A. park B. temple C. memorial D. doctor
2. A. teaching B. morning C. working D. reading
3. A. weather B. interesting C. beautiful D. expensive
4. A. on B. of C. at D. the
Question 2: Choose the best answer.( 3ps )
1. There is a park in front ………. the hotel.
A. of B. on C. to D. at
2. Hoi An is so ………. .
A. boring B. historic C. terrible D. modern
3. The town has many motorbikes. It’s very ……. .
A. quiet B. happy C. exciting D. noisy
4. Excuse me ! ………. there a post office near here ?
A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does
5. My head hurts. I need to take some ……. .
A. backpacks B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
6. Ayres Rock is in …….. .
A. Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain
B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN :
Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 1p)
1. You must ( get )…………………….………… up early .
2. Look ! Our teacher (come)………………………………………..
3. I (go) ………………………………..….. out to have dinner this evening.
4. …………….……. he usually (play)……………………………..… soccer every
afternoon ?
Question 2: Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets:
a. Travelling by taxi is …………………….………..…………….than by bus. (expensive)
b. The Sahara is the world’s ………………….………..………………desert. (hot)
c. This building is ………………………………..………… than that one (tall)
d. She’s not very happy. Her exam results are ……………..…………………..than her sister.
(good)
e. This is the ……………….………………….……. film I have ever seen (bad)
f. Loan is the ………………………..……………………. student in our class. (intelligent)
Question 3: Read the e-mail and answer the following questions.( 1,5ps)
79
Dear Phong,

I’m sorry I couldn’t write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we’re staying in a
small hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there’s a cinema, a bank, a
supermarket and some cafés. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very
noisy here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.

In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market
in my neighbourhood but there isn’t a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they
are cleaner and there isn’t so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has a
backyard and a front yard.

Love,
Minh

1. Where is Minh staying now?

…………………………………….……………………………………………………
2. Why is it very noisy around his hotel?
…………………………………….………………………………………………
3. What are there in his neighbourhood?
…………………………………………………………..………………………………
4. Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood?
……………………………………………………………………………………………
5. What are the streets in his neighbourhood like?
………………………………………………………………………………………
6. Is the air polluted ?
………………………………………………………………………………………

Question 4: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )

1. modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.
=> …………………………………………………………………..…………………
2. on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.
=> ………………………………………………………………..……………………………
3. a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?
=> ……………………………………………………………..………………………………
80
4. do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.
=> …………………………………………………………………..………………

Question 5: Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1p)
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your (1)………………………..…..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)………………………..….. and it’s on
your left.
A. Great! Where can I have some coffee ?
B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?
B: First (3)………………………..….. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your
left.
A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then (4)……………………… to the end of Le Loi Street,
and it’s
on your right.
Tape script:
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your left.
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second right and it’s on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have some coffee ?
B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?
B: First turn left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your left.
A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then go to the end of Le Loi Street, and it’s on your right.

V. Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:

A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :

Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:
Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
81
 Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1T 2F 3F 4T
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 27/ 11/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 3/ 12/ 2016

Period 42: Unit 6:

Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the interview between the interviewer
and Phong about the Vietnamese Tet holiday.

II. Teaching aids: - Cards, posters, cassette & tape.

III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students Board & contents

Warm up. A. WARM UP.
-Have Ss work in 2 groups. Matching
- Teacher sticks the pictures of holidays 1. Easter Day
on the board and asks Ss to match the 2. Christmas Day
pictures to the words phrases 3. Thanhsgiving Day
-Give feed back. 4. New Year’s Day
82
 B. NEW LESSON
Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss I. Getting Started.
about the picture

–He’s having an interview.

It’s about Vietnamese Tet

- What is Phong doing ? - What is the

interview about? Holiday.

1. Activity 1:
- give some new words. a. Pre - teach vocabulary:
- (to) celebrate:
- (to) decorate:
- fireworks:
- family gathering (n):
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R - peach blossom
Ss look at the conversation, listen to the - apricot blossom
tape and then work in pairs to practice
the conversation. - lucky money
- T asks some pairs to read the b. Listen and Read:
conversation again. -
- T asks Ss to read the conversation again a. Do the Vietnamese celebrate Tet at different
and answer the questions: times each year?
b. What should people do to celebrate Tet?
Ss work independently and decide if the c. Does Tim travel during Tet?
statements are true or false, then share 2. Activity 2: T/F statements
their answers with their partners.
- Ss give out their answers.Ss work Statements
independently and decide if the 1Phong is the first person on the show
83
statements are true or false, then share
2This year, Tet is in February.
their answers with their partners. 3.Tet is a quiet time of the year.
- T asks Ss to work in pairs. 4.Phong loves eating lots of good food during Tet.
- Ss refers to the conversation to find the
5.Next, the interview will talk to a person
information and fill in the blanks from Japan.
 Feedback1: 1.F, 2.F, 3.F, 4.T, 5.T
3. Activity 3: Gap Fillings
.Feedback 2:
- Ss match the words to the picture. 1. The end of January
( individually)

and pla
5. great food ; lucky money

-T reads aloud and Ss repeat in chorus gatherings

4. Activity 4: Matching
Lucky money e. swimming pool
a. peach blossom
- Ss look at the pictures again and find b. and apricot blosom
out the pictures relating to Tet c. house decorations
holiday. d. Banh chung and banh tet

-T asks Ss to play the game g. books

e. family gathering

h. School ground
 Feedback 3: 1.b; 2.a; 3.c; 4.e; 5.h; 6.g; 7.f;
8.d
5. Activity 5:
 Feedback 4: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
II. Consolidation :
- T asks Ss to write down three things or
activities they like best about Tet, using I
like/love/ enjoy...’

Homework C. HOME WORK

-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabularies.
-Asign home work. - Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Write about your Tet holiday.
- Do A.phonetics/40 (wb)
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

84
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 30/ 11/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 7/ 12/ 2016

Period 43: Unit 6:

Lesson 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know and use vocabulary related to ‘Tet’: things,
activities.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ /ʃ/ in isolation
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

I. WARM UP :
- Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back
* Give some new words II. NEW LESSON:
A. Vocabulary
* Pre teach Vocabulary:
- calendar
- (to) hang
- rubbbish
Vocabulary checking : R.O.R - should
- (to) wish
1.Activity 1
lucky money e.swimming pool
- T plays the recording and asks Ss to peach blossom and apricot
listen carefully and repeat the words in f. house decorations
chorus and ind. banh chung and banh tet g. books
family gathering h.school ground

85
 2. Activity 2 (pairwork)
T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 to label - Feedback: 1.b, 2.i, 3.d, 4.j, 5.f, 6.g, 7.h,
the pictures with the words in 1 8.e, 9.k, 10.c, 11.a
T asks Ss to work independently 3. Activity 3
suitable nouns, then check with their -
partners. T asks Ss to work Verbs
independently to match the verbs with go to do
the suitable nouns, then check with their
partners. give buy

make clean
cook visit

watch hang

- T asks Ss to write the phrases they decorate

a wish plant
have formed in 3 fireworks
our housetrees
a pagoda
relatives
special food
Feedback: 4. Activity 4:
lucky
cooknumber
special food
theplant
shopping
trees
T plays the recording. Ss listens  go blossoms
peach to a pagoda
carefully first and repeat. T plays the make a wish
a calendar
recording as many times as necessary.  give lucky money
Then asks them to write the words in the the furniture
hang a calendar
two appropriate boxes. Check if they do  visit relatives
this correctly. watch fireworks
T asks Ss to look at the sentences first  clean the furniture
and underline any words they think the shopping
contain the sounds /ʃ/ and /s/. After that  decorate our house
T plays the recording and Ss listen and peach blossom
decide which sentence has /s/ and which
has /ʃ/.
- Ss compare their answers in pairs
before T checks their answers with the
whole class T asks Ss to look at the
sentences first and underline any words
86
they think contain the sounds /ʃ/ and /s/.
After that T plays the recording and Ss
listen and decide which sentence has /s/
and which has /ʃ/.
- T asks Ss to listen to the poem and
practice reading it. B. PRONUNCIATION : /s/ & /ʃ/
-T asks them to pay more attention to 1. Activity 5
the key words with /s/ and /ʃ/ sounds. -
Then asks some volunteers to stand up /ʃ/
and read the poem aloud. She, shopping, should, wish, rubbish Blossoms, s
school, speac

2 Activity 6
-

Statements
1. We come home every summer
2. We should leave early.
3. I will make a wish
4. I’m second in class.
5. My mother goes shopping every day.
6. This is a small garden.
7. Spring is coming.
 Feedback: /ʃ/: 2,3,5
/s/ : 1,4,6,7
3. Activity 7:
Spring is coming!
Tet is coming!
She sells peach blossoms.
Her cheeks shine.
Her eyes smile.
Her smile is shy.
She sells peach blossoms.

Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK

-Assign home work. - Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: closer look2

87
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 2/ 12/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 9/ 12/ 2016
Period 44: Unit 6 :
Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. Teaching points:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to identify and practice the language of
intentions with ‘will’ and advice with ‘should’.
II. Preparations:
Posters, picturest’:
III.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
IV. Teaching steps.

88
 Teacher & Students Board & contents
A. WARM UP:
Have Ss work in 2 teams Brainstorming
-Give feed back. Ss name the things for Tet :

B. NEW LESSON.
1. Presentation
Explain to them some new words. * Pre-teach Vo:
- (to) climb
(to) cheat
- (to) behave - (to) fight
- (to) break
(to) make a wish
Check: Matching ( individually)
.
- T asks Ss to look at the picture and
comment.

T set the scene.

T writes the sentences on the board.

answers on the board.
Nam, you shouldn’t wet the floor. You
T checks the meaning, use and form of should take your raincoat
the structure off first.’
- a. Meaning : should: nên, shouldn’t :
T ask Ss to give out some more examples không nên
with ‘should/ shouldn’t’ b. Use : express advice
c. Form : should(n’t) + bare-inf..
EX:
T asks Ss to look at the pictures and 2. Practice
complete the sentences with * Activity 1:
‘should/shouldn’t’  Feedback: 1. Shouldn’t, 2. Should,
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures and Tet 3. Shouldn’t,
activities. Ss tick at the activities children
should do at tet and cross at the activities should
they shouldn’t * Activity 2
 Feedback: 1. Should, 2. Shouldn’t,
3. Should,

Shouldn’t
89
* Activity 3
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 10/ 12/ 2016

Period 45: Unit 6 :

Lesson 4 : COMMUNICATION

I.Teaching points: After the lesson Ss can:

- Review comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature.
- Use “ must and mustn’t ” to give order.
II.Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters,TV and computer
III. teaching steps.
Teacher & Students Board & contents
Warm up I. WARM- UP:
-Ask Ss to play in 2 groups. Make sentences:
- T asks Ss to look at it for 2 minutes
and try to remember as much as they
can.
- T asks the class to cover the page and
tell T what they remember.
- T elicits answers by asking:

-Ss write the answer on the board. a. Crater Lake/ nice/ world > Crater lake is
the nicest in the world.
b. The Library of Congress/ big/ world .The
Library of Congress is the biggest in the
world.
II. NEW LESSON
1. Vocabulary
- Give new words. Tent : lều, rạp
waterproof coat : áo mưa, vải không thấm
nươc
torch: ngọn đuốc, đèn pin
-checking: R-O- R map: bản đồ
sun hat: mũ, nón che nắng
mobile phone: điện thoại di động
diverse (a):gồm nhiều loại khác nhau
ACt1. Read the travel guide entry.
90
- T asks Ss to open their books and read - T asks Ss to read the sentences.
quickly to check their predictions. - T sets 5 minutes limit for Ss to reread the
- T sets 2 minutes limit to ensure Ss text and answer T or F.
read quickly for information. - Ss work individually, then compare the
answers with their partners.
Modal Verbs: Show obligatory
Must/ Mustn’t + Vinf
Ex: You must bring a compass.
You mustn’t wear shorts or T-shirt when you
climb the Everest.
act2. Now make a list of things you must
- T asks Ss to complete the table ( Work take to the Himalayas. Then add things you
individually ). mustn’t take.
MUST MUSTN’T
Compass Go alone
Torch Shorts
Tent T-shirts
Coat
Waterproof
flashlight
Sun hat
Mobile phone
map
Ask for advice
- T pairs Ss ands asks them to use the
ideas they brainstormed to fill in their Act3. Role-play being a tour guide and a
own schedule. tourist. Tell your partner what to prepare
- T can ask Ss to sit back and back. for their trip to the Himalayas. Try to give
- Ss have 3 minutes to speak each other. reasons.
- Ss can report to the class about their Ex:
partner’s schedule. A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
- T asks the class to cover the page and B: OK. I think you must take the
tell T what they remember. ............because it is ....................
T: Give homework A: Yes. Anything else?
Ss: Copy B: ..........
Ss’ work ( pairs) Act4.Perform your role-play for the class.

-Summarize the main point of the III. Home work

lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabs
-Assign home work. -Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1.
Adjustments:
91
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 10/ 12/ 2016

Period 46: Test correction

I. NhËn xÐt chung vÒ bµi lµm cña HS:

- §a sè häc sinh cã ý thøc tù lµm bµi, tuy nhiªn kÕt qu¶ cha thËt tèt
- NhiÒu Hs viÕt xÊu, tr×nh bµy bÈn.
- NhiÒu em lµm bµi chia ®éng tõ vµ viÕt l¹i c©u cha tèt.
II.иp ¸n vµ thang ®iÓm chÊm

A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM :

Question 1: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:
Question 1: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. speaks 2. are… doing - am reading 3 aren’t going
Question 2: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn’t
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5đ/ câu đúng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25đ/ câu đúng)
1T 2F 3F 4T
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
92
 Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2016
Ngày dạy: 10/ 12/ 2016

Period 47: Unit 6: Our Tet holiday

Lesson : Skills 1
A. Objectives :
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get to know New Year practices in other countries.
B. Preparations :
Posters, pictures.
C. Procedure :
I. Warm up : Matching game
- T asks Ss to match the flags with the countries, then match the countries with the
nationalities. (Activity 1)

Viet Nam Holland Japan the USA

Scotland Thailand Korea Australia

Japanese America Scottish Vietnamese

Australian Dutch Thai Korean

93
T reads the words of countries and nationalities aloud and asks Ss to repeat in chorus and ind.
-T models the way to do this with a student (Activitiy 2)
Ex: A: I’m from England.
B: You’re English.
- T asks Ss to hold a flag, move around the class, meet their friends and introduce where they
come from. Then their friends will tell them their nationalities.
II. New lesson :
1.Pre- Reading: Activity 3
- T gives out the pictures of people in different countries celebrating New Year differently and
asks Ss to match them with the different groups of people
Feedback:
1. The Scottish, Scotland 3. The H’Mong, Viet Nam
2. The Thai, Thailand 4. The Japanese, Japan
2. While-reading:
* Activity 4:
- T asks Ss to read the four paragraphs. T helps Ss by drawing their attention to some details
from the reading and referring to the picture provided in 3. T asks to Ss to underline the verbs
and the objects to remember the information from the reading.
Feedback: a. H’mong b. Thai c. Japanese d. Scottish
* Activity 5:
- T asks Ss to find and check the meaning of some new words as they are used in the text by
matching them with the definitions.
Feedback: a. feathers: the covers of a rooster, chicken or bird.
b. cool down: become colder
c. remove: take away
d. first footer: the first person to enter your home after New Year’s Eve.
3. Post Reading:
- T asks Ss to work in groups to write the two fact they like best down on a piece of paper.
then they take turns to read aloud. The group decides which group of people he/she is talking
about.
D. Homework
- Describe your house
- Do exercises 1 ( P.12) ,2 (P.13)
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………......................

Ngày soạn : 3/ 12/ 2016

Ngày dạy: 13/ 12/ 2016

94
 Period 46:

PERIOD Unit : OUR TET HOLIDAY

Lesson 1: Getting Started
Happy newyear
I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the interview between the interviewer
and Phong about the Vietnamese Tet holiday.

* Teaching aids: - Cards, posters, cassette & tape.

II. Teaching steps.
Teacher and Students Board & contents
Warm up. B. WARM UP.
-Have Ss work in 2 groups. Matching
- Teacher sticks the pictures of holidays 1. Easter Day
on the board and asks Ss to match the 2. Christmas Day
pictures to the words phrases 3. Thanhsgiving Day
-Give feed back. 4. New Year’s Day

B. NEW LESSON
I. Getting Started.
Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss
about the picture

–He’s having an interview.

It’s about Vietnamese Tet

- What is Phong doing ? - What is the

interview about? Holiday.
1. Activity 1:
a. Pre - teach vocabulary:
95
- give some new words. - (to) celebrate:
- (to) decorate:
- fireworks:
- family gathering (n):
- peach blossom
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R - apricot blossom
Ss look at the conversation, listen to the - lucky money
tape and then work in pairs to practice b. Listen and Read:
the conversation. -
- T asks some pairs to read the a. Do the Vietnamese celebrate Tet at different
conversation again. times each year?
- T asks Ss to read the conversation again b. What should people do to celebrate Tet?
and answer the questions: c. Does Tim travel during Tet?
2. Activity 2: T/F statements
Ss work independently and decide if the -
statements are true or false, then share
their answers with their partners. Statements
- Ss give out their answers.Ss work 1Phong is the first person on the show
independently and decide if the 2This year, Tet is in February.
statements are true or false, then share 3.Tet is a quiet time of the year.
their answers with their partners. 4.Phong loves eating lots of good food during Tet.
- T asks Ss to work in pairs. 5.Next, the interview will talk to a person from
- Ss refers to the conversation to find the Japan.
information and fill in the blanks  Feedback1: 1.F, 2.F, 3.F, 4.T, 5.T
3. Activity 3: Gap Fillings
.Feedback 2: 1. The end of January

- Ss match the words to the picture. house

( individually)
flowers and plants

fireworks

-T reads aloud and Ss repeat in chorus food ; lucky money

family gatherings
4. Activity 4: Matching
- Ss look at the pictures again and find f. Lucky money
out the pictures relating to Tet e. swimming pool
96
 holiday. g. peach blossom
h. and apricot blosom
-T asks Ss to play the game i.
decorations
j. Banh chung and banh tet

g. books
k. family gathering

h. School ground

 Feedback 3: 1.b; 2.a; 3.c; 4.e; 5.h; 6.g;

7.f; 8.d
5. Activity 5:
 Feedback 4: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
II. Consolidation :
- .
- T asks Ss to write down three things or
activities they like best about Tet, using
I like/love/ enjoy...’
.
Homework C. HOME WORK
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabularies.
-Asign home work. - Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Write about your Tet holiday.
- Do A.phonetics/40 (wb)
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

PERIOD Unit 6: our tet holiday.

Lesson 3: a closer look 2

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to identify and practice the language of intentions
with ‘will’ and advice with ‘should’.

B. Preparations: Posters, picturest’: *Teaching aids: cassette, poster.

III. Teaching steps.
97
 Teacher & Students Board & contents
A. WARM UP:
Have Ss work in 2 teams Brainstorming
-Give feed back. Ss name the things for Tet :

B. NEW LESSON.
1. Presentation
Explain to them some new words. * Pre-teach Vo:
- (to) climb
(to) cheat
- (to) behave - (to) fight
- (to) break
(to) make a wish
Check: Matching ( individually)
.
- T asks Ss to look at the picture and ‘Nam, you shouldn’t wet the
comment. - floor. You should take your
raincoat off first.’
‘
T set the scene.

T writes the sentences on the board.

answers on the board.
Nam, you shouldn’t wet the floor. You
T checks the meaning, use and form of should take your raincoat
the structure off first.’
- a. Meaning : should: nên, shouldn’t :
T ask Ss to give out some more examples không nên
with ‘should/ shouldn’t’ b. Use : express advice
c. Form : should(n’t) + bare-inf..
EX:
2. Practice
T asks Ss to look at the pictures and * Activity 1:
complete the sentences with  Feedback: 1. Shouldn’t, 2. Should,
‘should/shouldn’t’ 3. Shouldn’t,
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures and Tet
activities. Ss tick at the activities children
98 should
should do at tet and cross at the activities * Activity 2
they shouldn’t  Feedback: 1. Should, 2. Shouldn’t,
 PERIOD

Unit 5: our tet holiday

Lesson 2 A closer look 1

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know and use vocabulary related to ‘Tet’: things,
activities.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ /ʃ/ in isolation
*Teaching aids: cassette, poster.

II. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents
I. WARM UP :
Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back
* Give some new words II. NEW LESSON:
A. Vocabulary
* Pre teach Vocabulary:
- calendar
- (to) hang
- rubbbish
Vocabulary checking : R.O.R - should
- (to) wish
1.Activity 1
lucky money e.swimming pool
peach blossom and apricot
- T plays the recording and asks f. house decorations
Ss to listen carefully and repeat banh chung and banh tet g. books
the words in chorus and ind. family gathering h. school ground

2. Activity 2 (pairwork)
T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 - Feedback: 1.b, 2.i, 3.d, 4.j, 5.f, 6.g, 7.h, 8.e, 9.k,
to label the pictures with the 10.c, 11.a
99
words in 1 3. Activity 3
T asks Ss to work independently -
suitable nouns, then check with Verbs
their partners. T asks Ss to work go to do decorate a wish special food
independently to match the
verbs with the suitable nouns, give buy plant
fireworks lucky number
then check with their partners.
make our house the shopping
clean
trees
cook visit a pagoda peach blossoms

watch hang relatives a calendar

the furniture
- T asks Ss to write the phrases  Feedback: 4. Activity 4:
they have formed in 3  cook special food
 go to a pagoda
wish
 give lucky money
calendar
 visit relatives
fireworks
 clean the furniture
T plays the recording. Ss listens shopping
carefully first and repeat. T  decorate our house
plays the recording as many blossom
times as necessary. Then asks
them to write the words in the
two appropriate boxes. Check if
they do this correctly.
T asks Ss to look at the
sentences first and underline any
words they think contain the
sounds /ʃ/ and /s/. After that T
plays the recording and Ss listen
and decide which sentence
has /s/ and which has /ʃ/. B. PRONUNCIATION : /s/ & /ʃ/
- Ss compare their answers in 1. Activity 5
pairs before T checks their -
answers with the whole class T /ʃ/
asks Ss to look at the sentences She, shopping, should, wish, rubbish Blossoms, summer, ri
first and underline any words school, speacial, spring
they think contain the sounds /ʃ/
100
and /s/. After that T plays the 2 Activity 6
recording and Ss listen and -
decide which sentence has /s/
and which has /ʃ/. Statements
- T asks Ss to listen to the poem 8. We come home every summer
and practice reading it. 9. We should leave early.
-T asks them to pay more
attention to the key words 10.I will make a wish
with /s/ and /ʃ/ sounds. Then 11. I’m second in class.
asks some volunteers to stand 12.My mother goes shopping every day.
up and read the poem aloud.
13.This is a small garden.
14.Spring is coming.
 Feedback: /ʃ/: 2,3,5
/s/ : 1,4,6,7
3. Activity 7:
Spring is coming!
Tet is coming!
She sells peach blossoms.
Her cheeks shine.
Her eyes smile.
Her smile is shy.
She sells peach blossoms.

Summarize the main point of III. HOMEWORK

the lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabs
-Assign home work. -Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: closer look2

PERIOD 36 Unit 5: natural wonders of the world

Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION
P:
T:
I.Teaching points: After the lesson Ss can:
- Review comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature.
- Use “ must and mustn’t ” to give order.
*Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters,TV and computer
101
 II. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students Board & contents

Warm up I. WARM- UP:
-Ask Ss to play in 2 groups. Make sentences:
- T asks Ss to look at it for 2 minutes
and try to remember as much as they
can.
- T asks the class to cover the page and
tell T what they remember.
- T elicits answers by asking:

-Ss write the answer on the board. a. Crater Lake/ nice/ world > Crater lake is
the nicest in the world.
b. The Library of Congress/ big/ world > The
Library of Congress is the biggest in the
world.

II. NEW LESSON

1. Vocabulary
- Give new words. Tent : lều, rạp
waterproof coat : áo mưa, vải không thấm
nươc
torch: ngọn đuốc, đèn pin
-checking: R-O- R map: bản đồ
sun hat: mũ, nón che nắng
mobile phone: điện thoại di động
diverse (a):/ dai’ves/ gồm nhiều loại khác
nhau
- T asks Ss to open their books and read ACt1. Read the travel guide entry.
quickly to check their predictions. - T asks Ss to read the sentences.
- T sets 2 minutes limit to ensure Ss - T sets 5 minutes limit for Ss to reread the
read quickly for information. text and answer T or F.
- Ss work individually, then compare the
answers with their partners.
Modal Verbs: Show obligatory
Must/ Mustn’t + Vinf
Ex: You must bring a compass.
You mustn’t wear shorts or T-shirt when you
climb the Everest.
- T asks Ss to complete the table ( Work act2. Now make a list of things you must
102
individually ). take to the Himalayas. Then add things you
mustn’t take.
MUST MUSTN’T
Compass Go alone
Torch Shorts
Tent T-shirts
Coat
Waterproof
flashlight
Sun hat
Mobile phone
map
Ask for advice

- T pairs Ss ands asks them to use the Act3. Role-play being a tour guide and a
ideas they brainstormed to fill in their tourist. Tell your partner what to prepare
own schedule. for their trip to the Himalayas. Try to give
- T can ask Ss to sit back and back. reasons.
- Ss have 3 minutes to speak each other. Ex:
- Ss can report to the class about their A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
partner’s schedule. B: OK. I think you must take the
- T asks the class to cover the page and ............because it is ....................
tell T what they remember. A: Yes. Anything else?
T: Give homework B: ..........
Ss: Copy
-
Ss’ work ( pairs) Act4.Perform your role-play for the class.

-Summarize the main point of the III. Home work

lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabs
-Assign home work. -Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1.

103
Period 33: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 1:

104
105
 Ngày soạn : 6/ 12/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 13/ 12/ 2013
Period 48: Unit 6 : Our Tet holiday
Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what Mai and her mother will
buy for Tet and what they will buy for the people in their family.
- Write an e-mail to talk about what they should/ shouldn’t, will/ won’t buy for Tet.
- Skill: Listening and writing.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new
lesson.
- Ask Ss to recall the things in the box - Ask Ss to recall the things in the box :
+ peach blossom.
+ banh chung.
+ clothes
2. Presentation. 1Mai and her mother are going shopping
for Tet. Listen and tick the things they
will buy.
- Listen
3. Practice.
- They will buy a peach blossom,.....
- Ask Ss which they will buy .
- Play the recording for the answer.
2. Listen again and write the names of
things they will buy for the people in
column A.
1- some new clothes.
2- a new tie
3- some sweets

WRITING

106
 3. Write an e-mail to a friend about your
Tet holiday. Include what you will and
won’t do. Also include things people
3. Write an e-mail about Tet use will/ should and shouldn’t do. Use your notes
won’t, should/ shouldn’t. from Speaking and the rest of the unit to
- Ask some questions to prepare the class help you.
for the activity - What is it ?
- What does this letter talk about?

4. In notes , fill each blank in the

network with the inforation about the
place.Then use these notes to write a
short paragraph about it.

4. Production.
1- How do you feel about Tet?
- Aska Ss some questions about their 2- This year, what should/ shouldn’t you
plans for Tet do?
3- This year, what will/ won’t you do?

5. Home work.
- Revision will/ won’t, should/ shouldn’t.
- Complete all the exercises in workbook
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

107
 Ngày soạn : 9/ 12/ 2013
Ngày dạy: 16/ 12/ 2013
Period 49: Unit 6 : Our Tet holiday
Lesson 7: Looking back

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocab related to Tet and the grammar
points: should/ shouldn’t, will/ won’t.
- They also communicate by rearranging the words to make New Year wishes and greetings.
II. Teaching aids:
poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Draw lines to match the
notebooks individually and then check with actions on the left with the things on the
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let right
them repeat the words. Check their KEY
pronounciation. 1. j 2.b 3. e.........
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and 2. Activity 2
complete them with the adjectives they have KEY
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 1About Tet:.......
words, phrases and sentences before and 2. Not about Tet
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives. B. Grammar
Activity 3 KEY:
Ss make sentences with will and won’t
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually Activity 4 KEY
first. then they can check their answers with Ss make sentences with should/ shouldn’t
a partner before discussing the answers as a C. Communication
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of  Activity 5 KEY
their original answers so they can 1 I wish you a happy new year
use that information in their Now you 2 Have a great year with your studies
can......statements.
108
 3 ...............
-T elicits the language being practiced in this :*Activity 7.
activity Finished! Now you can..
-use the words and
phrases for Tet
-Ask and talk about Tet in
Viet Nam
-will/ won’t for intentions
-should/ should for advice
-ask and talk about Tet in
Viet Nam.
-T ask ss look at the picture of two D. Project
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the Write down in a big letters the three
tipical features of them. dreams you have for this year.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their
imagination.( if have time)

-Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK.

-Assign home work. -Learn the new words.
-Make a wish.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

109
 Ngày soạn : 10 / 12 / 2013
Ngày dạy: 17-21 / 12/ 2013
Period 50+51: Review 2

I. Objectives

- Revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practised since unit 4.
II. Teaching aids:
textbook, cassette.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

I. Pronunciation:
- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final-
s/es. * Key :
Ex 1: 1D 2C 3C 4A 5B
- Ss do Ex 1 individually then share their
answers with a partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board to write the
answer.
- T corrects and give the correct answers.
Ex 2:
- T holds a game. Asks Ss to find the name of
school things and furniture in the house
which begin with / b /and / p / ( in pairs ). The
pair that finds the most words will go to the
board and write their answers . / b / : book, bag, bed ......
- Asks other to add any more words. / p / pen, pencil, picture, ...

II. Vocabulary:
EX 3 :
- Ss do ex 3 individually
- Asks Ss to share their answers with a
partner. 1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
- Asks Ss to come to the board and write 5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
down the answers. - Play: sports, badminton
- Checks Ss’answers and give the correct - Have: lunch, a lesson
answers. - Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.

110
 Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
EX 4: Crossword puzzle 5. apartment 6. porter
- Ss work in pairs to do the crossword. Down : 2. dining room 4. hall

Ex 5: Choose the correct words.

- Asks Ss to do ex5 individually. 1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working
- Ss give the correct answers. 4. patient 5. sporty.
- T corrects and give correct answers

III. Grammar :
- Elicits the use of the present simple and the
present continuous.

Ex 6: 1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not

- Asks Ss to do ex6. going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping
- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board, 5.is
others do it on their notebook.
- Checks Ss’ answers

Ex 7:
- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention 1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have 4. is
to the hints, do exercise individuallyand 5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is
compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss’ answers and gives the correct
answers.

Ex 8:
- Ss work in pairs to do ex8
- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

Ex9:
- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs. 6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4
- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the
conversation

IV. Skills: Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B

1. Reading: Ex 2 : 1. it’s in a quiet place not far from....
- Ss do ex1,2 individually. 2. They’re hard-working and serious.
- Ss compare the answers with their partner. .............
111
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

2. Speaking:
- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews
the other two about what they like and
dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members’ answers in
the table and report them to the class, then
summerises Ss’ideas.

3. Listening :
Ex 4 :
- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen
- Play the recording again for Ss to check kitchen – garden – living room – bedroom.
their answers.
- Asks Ss to give their answers
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
Ex 5:
- Ss read the questions quickly.
- T plays the recording again and answer the 1. She’s watering the plants in the garden.
questions 2. He’s listening to the radio
- Ss compare their answers with a partner. 3. He’s inMi’s bedroom.
- Give feedback and correct answers. 4. She’s watching TV.

4. Writing:
- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.
- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail
on the board
- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
* Homework : - Write homework on their notebook.
- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the first term test.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

112
 Ngày soạn: 16/ 12/ 2013
Ngày dạy : 23-24- 30/ 12/ 2013

Period 52+53+54 Revision

I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use what they learnt to do exercise.
II. Teaching aids:
textbook, extra-board.
III. Teaching steps:
- Revise :
+ The present simple tense and present continuous tense
+ Comparative and superative
- Asks Ss to do exercises
Question I. Give the correct form of the verbs in bracket.
1. What time you ( go ) to school everyday ? – I (go) at 6.30
2. Tuan (meet) you this evening ?
- He (not meet) me, his sister (meet) me.
3. He (can) draw very well.
4. Tu and his brother (go) swimming now?
- No, they (not go) swimming, they (play)
5. You mustn’t (sit) on the table.
6. She ( have) breakfast at 6.30 every morning ?
- No. She (not have) at 6.30, she (have) at 6.00.
7. I won’t (go) to Ha Noi next week, I will ( have) a party with my family.
8. Now it (be) 11 o’clock, you ( eat) lunch ?
- No, I (not eat) , I (cook)
9. There ( be ) four chairs in the kitchen ?
- No, there (not be) four, there (be) one.
10. They like ( read ) books in the library.
* Answer key :
1. do you go- go
2. Is Tuan meeting – isn’t meeting – is meeting
3. draw
4. Are … going – aren’t go – are playing.
5. sit
6. Does she have – doesn’t have – has
7. go - have
……………………

113
Question II. Change the adjectives in backet into comparatives or superatives.
1. This house is (tall) than that one
2. My mother cooks (good) than me.
3. This is the (interesting) I’ve seen
4. Lam is the (short) student in my group
5. Today is the (happy) day in my life.
6. This is the (good) school in my village.
7. The roads in my town are ( noisy) than in your town.
8. This bag is (bad) than that one.
9. These books are ( expensive) than those ones.
10. She is the (bad) singer in her group.
* Answer key:
1. taller
2. better
3. most interesting
4. shortest
5. happiest
6. best
7. noisier
9. more expensive
10. worst
Question III. Reorder the words to make the meaningfull sentences
1. a / is/ the / there / living room / TV / in ?
2. house / next / the / my / is / to / hospital.
3. should / at / well / you / Tet / behave.
4. year / he / study / this / must / hard .
5. five / are / in / people / there / family / his.
6. statue /of / a / the / there / in / lakes / are / front / two / big.
7. we / by /shall /market / the / go / bus / to.
8. the / on / turning / take / the /third / right.
* Answer key:
1. Is there a Tv in the living room ?
2. My house is next to the hospital.
3. you should behave well at Tet
4. he must study hard this year.
5.there are five people in his family
…………
Question IV: Complete the following sentences using the given words:
have , do , play , is , study , has , are
1. she …… tall and thin. She …… black hair and a round face.
114
 2. They …… judo very well.

3. I …….. maths on Monday and Friday.

4. We …… badminton every afternoon.
5. What …… they doing ?
6. They …….. English very well.
* Answer key:
1. is – has
2. do
3. have
4. play
5. are
6. study

* Adjustment:
………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………

115
 HỌC KỲ II (Năm học :2014-2015)

Date of planning: 4/1/2015

Date of teaching: 5/1/2015

Period 57 - UNIT 7: TELEVISION

Lesson 1: Getting started
A. Objectives :
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
+ Read the conversation again and answer the questions about the TV, use some adjectives to
describe a TV programme Ss have watched.
+ Talk about a favorite TV programme.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: channel, check, schedule…..
2. Grammar: conjunctions: so
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Warmer (5'): Chatting

- Write the words “TELEVISION” on the
board.
- Who can give ideas or vocabularies - Give ideas or vocabularies relating to
relating to this topic? the topic
- You can give vietnamese words if you
don’t know the words in English.
I. Presentation (10')
1. Vocabulary 1. 1. Vocabulary:
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach Programme(n) chương trình truyền
vocab (situation, realia) hình
Channel (n) kênh truyền hình
116
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. Check (v) kiểm tra
Stupid (adj) ngu ngốc
Awful (adj) kinh khủng
Schedule(n) bản chương trình
* Checking vocab: Recall Vocab check: ROR
- Copy all the words
2. * Set the scenes:
? Look at the picture on page 6 - Answer the questions individually.
? Who are they? - They are Phong and Hung.
? What are they doing? - They are talking about their favorite
- We are going to listen and read a programme.
dialogue between Phong and Hung.
II. Practice (20')
1/ Listen and read.
- Play the recording twice. - Listen and read
? Listen and read then check your answer - Check their answers
for the last question.
a/ Read the conservation again and
answer the questions.
? Run through the questions. Present, run through the questions and
? Work individually. answer them.
? Share answers with your partner.
1/ What is Hung’ favourite TV programme?
2/ What channel is Laughing out Loud on? 1. Laughing out Loud.
3/ Are Laughing out Loud and Mr Bean on
at the same time? 2. VTV3
4/ Why doesn’t Phong like Mr Bean? 3. No, they aren’t.
5/ What does Phong say about Tom? 4. Because he is awful.
- Teacher gets feedback 5. Tom is stupid, but funny.
b/ Find the adjectives describing each
character in the conversation and write Find the adjectives describing each
them here. character in the conversation and write
Mr Bean: _______________ them.
Tom: _______________ Mr Bean: funny,awful
Jerry: _______________ Tom: stupid, funny
c/ Which adj(s) below can you use to Jerry: intelligent
describe a TV programme you have
watched? What programme is it? Find the adjectives describing each
character in the conversation and write
them
Popular/ long/ educational/ boring/ funny/ Individual work
good/ live/ entertaining. Yes: Popular, historical, serious, long,
117
 educational, boring, funny, good, live,
entertaining.
2/ Put the correct word in the box under No: beautiful, small.
each picture.
? - Ask Ss to work individually. - Ss work individually
? - Ask them to share answers with their 1. national television
partner. 2. news programme
3. local television
- Teacher gets feedback 4. comedy
3/ Use suitable words to complete the 5. game show
sentences: 6. animal programme
? - Ask Ss to work individually.
? - Ask them to share answers with their - Ss work individually
partner. - Ss share answers with their partner.
- Teacher gets feedback
1/ national
2/ comedy 1/ national
3/ channels 2/ comedy
4/ competition 3/ channels
5/ Cartoons 4/ competition
6/ educational 5/ Cartoons
4./ Work in group. 6/ educational
Write down two things you like about
television and two things you don’t like
about it. Talk to other in your group and - Ss work in groups
see how many people share your ideas. Write down two things they like about
Likes: 1._________ television and two things they don’t
2. _________ like about it. Talk to other in their
Dislike:1. __________ group and see how many people share
2. __________ their ideas.
III. Production ( 6')
? Tell your friends about your favorite TV
programme. - Ss tell their friends about their
? Why do you like it? favorite TV programme and the reason.
IV. Consolidation (2')
? What is the topic of the lesson today?
V. Homework (2') - Answer individually
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 1
- Take note
* Adjustment:
118
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................

***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***
Date of planning: 4/1/2015
Date of teaching: 6/ 1/ 2015
Period 58 UNIT 7: TELEVISION
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
+/ Use the lexical items related to television
+/ Pronunciation /θ/ and /ð /
B. Content:
Vocabulary: MC, viewer, TV schedule, weatherman, newsreader, remote control.
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Warmer (5'): 1. Warm up.

? Look at the pictures on page 8 and answer
my questions - Ss look at the pictures then answer the
? Who are they and what are these? questions
- Introduce the new lesson.
I. Vocabulary (15')
1. Teaching vocab */ New words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach - MC (n) người dẫn chương trình.
vocab (situation, realia) - viewer (n) người xem ti vi
- TV schedule (n) lịch phát CT ti vi
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - weatherman (n) người thông báo tin
thời tiết trên đài hoặc TV
- newsreader (n) người đọc bản tin trên
đài, truyền hình.
- remote control (n) điều khiển từ xa
- Checking vocab: Slap the board
* Checking vocab: Slap the board

119
1. Write the words/ phrases in the box
under the pictures. Ss work in groups to write the words/
Ask Ss to work in groups to write the phrases in the box under the pictures
words/ phrases in the box under the KEY
pictures 1- newsreader
- Play the recording and let Ss listen 2- TV schedule
? Listen and read then check your answer. 3- MC
4- viewer
- Play it again and pause for them to repeat 5- remote control
each word. 6- weatherman
- Correct their pronunciation.
2. Choose a word from the box for each - Ss work individually
description below. - Ss share answers with their partner.
KEY
? - Ask Ss to work individually. 1- weatherman
2- newsreader
3- remote control
? - Ask them to share answers with their 4- MC
partner. 5- volume button
6- TV viewer
- Teacher gets feedback
3. Game.
- Ask Ss to refer to 2 and the suggusted - Listen to the teacher
structures in 3 to see how a word is defined. - Ss work in groups
- Ask Ss to work in groups to do this - Ss share answers with other groups.
exercise. 1. newsreader: a person who reads news
- Help SS by writing some promts on the 2. Weatherman: a man who gives a
board so that SS can imitate. weather forecast
EX: Comedian: a person whose job is to
Newsreader: A person who reads news make people laugh by telling jokes and
? - Ask them to share answers with other funny stories
groups.
- Teacher gets feedback
II. Pronunciation (15') - Listen to the teacher
- Explain how to pronounce the two sounds
/ θ / and / ð /.
? Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the
sounds - Practice sounding out the sound
4. Listen and repeat the words. / θ / and / ð / together
- Practice sounding out the sound - Ss number the words in the order they
/ θ / and / ð / together hear.
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to - Listen and repeat
120
number the words in the order they hear.
- Play the recording again and ask the Ss to
repeat.
5. Which words in 4 have / θ / and which
words have / ð /? Listen again and write listen again and write them in the corect
them in the corect column. column. Then check the answer key .
- Play the tape twice / θ /: theatre, thanhsgiving, earth,
? Work individually to put the words into anything, both, through
two groups. / ð /: there, them, neither, weatherman
? Check your answers in groups. than, feather
- Have two students write on the board.
- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary.
III. Production ( 6') - Listen and take turns reading the
6. Tongue Twister sentence.
- Play the recroding
? Ask the Ss to take turns reading the
sentence quickly and correctly.
IV. Consolidation (2') - Answer the question.
? How to make the sounds / θ / and / ð /
? Find some more words that have these
two sounds
.V. Homework (2')
? Learn by heart all the new words. - Do as directed
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2

* Adjustment:
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................

***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***

121
 Date of planning: 4/1/2015
Date of teaching: 7/ 1/ 2015
Period 59
UNIT 7: TELEVISION
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2

A. Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use conjunctions (and, but, because...) and
question words (where, who, why ...) correctly.
B. Content:
- Grammar: Conjunctions + Wh - questions.
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

1. Warm up. Chatting

- Discuss some real questions.
1. What are you doing now ? - Answer the questions.
2. How do you go to school ?
3. How far is it from your house to
school?
2. Presentation. 1. Read the conversation and underline
1. Read the conversation and underline the question words.
the question words. Ss ask and answer the questions in order
- Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions to see the function of each. Then
in order to see the function of each. Then underline the question words.
underline the question words.
* Question Words KEY
- T asks some questions and ask SS to 1- What
find out the question words. 2- Where
- Teacher gets feedback 3- How long
122
3. Practice.
2. Use one of the question words in 2. Use one of the question words in
the box to complete the conversations. the box to complete the conversations.
- When, Where, How often, Who, What
- Suggest Ss look at the answer in order - Ss look at the answer in order to choose
to choose the correct question word. the correct question word.
- Ask Ss to work individually by - Ss work individually by guessing.
guessing.
- Play the tape. Let Ss to look at the Keys:
conversations as they listen and check 1. How often, What
their answers. 2. Who
- Teacher gets feedback 3. When, Where
3. Complete the conversation about 3. Complete the conversation about
The Wingless Penguin with suitable The Wingless Penguin with suitable
question words. question words.
? - Ask Ss to work in pairs. Keys:
A. What
? - Ask them to share answers with their A. What
partner. A. How many
A. Why?
- Teacher gets feedback A. What time/When
*Conjunctions:
4. Use but, and, so, because, although 4. Use but, and, so, because, although to
to complete sentences. complete sentences.
- T gives some conjunctions then explain - Listen to the teacher.
the way to use. KEY
- Explain that there is always comma 1- and
with so and although. 2- but
- T writes the example on the board, then 3- Although
guides the way to do. 4- because
5- so
5. Match the beginnings and the 5. Match the beginnings and the
endings. endings.
KEY
1- Watching too much TV is not good
because it hurts your eyes
2- I will get up early tomorrow, so I can
- T can go around the class and explain be at the stadium in time.
the students how to do. Then give the 3- Sometimes we read books and
correct answers and ask Ss to check sometimes we play sports.
-Ss liten and correct their answer. 4- My little brother can colour a picture
but he cannot draw.
123
 5- Although Ann preferred going out, she
stayed at home.
6. Work in groups. 6. Work in groups.
KEY
- Guide the Ss do this exercise. - What is the name of the national TV
- Ask Ss to asks and answer in groups chanel?
using the out line given in Ss’ books. - How many hours does it broadcast? /
How long is it on?
- (It depends on each student.)
- How much does cable TV cost per
- T correct mistakes if neccessary. month?
- Who is your favourite TV person?
4. Production.
? Tell your friends about television in - Do as directed.
Viet Nam.
5. Home work.
- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in - Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
the textbook. Prepare the new lesson. the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.

* Adjustment:
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................

***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***

124
 Date of planning: 11/1/2015
Date of teaching: 12/ 1/ 2015
Period 60
UNIT 7 TELEVISION
Lesson 4 Communication
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :
- Read a TV schedule and descriptions of famous children’s programmes for specific
information .
- Ss get to know some strange / famous facts relating to television around the world .
II. Teaching aids: Computer , Poster, pictures.
III.Proceduces.
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
I. Warm up: * Chatting
* Chatting : S1 : What is your favorite programme ?
Ask Ss to ask and answer about their S2 : ....................................................
favorite programme .
S1: Which channel is it on ?
S2 :......................................................
II. New lesson. 1/ New words:
- clumsy: Vụng về
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach - mini-series : phim truyền hình
vocab (situation, explaination )
- cute : dễ thương
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - entertain : giải trí
- detective : thám tử
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R - adventure : Cuộc phiêu lưu
- audience : Khán giả
III : Practice : * Vocabulary checking : R.O.R
Act1: Complete the facts below with the Act1: Complete the facts below with the
name of the correct country . name of the correct country .
Ask Ss to complete the facts below with Ss complete the facts below with the
the name of the correct country name of the correct country
- Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs, share the answers in pairs, before
before giving the answers. checking the answers and copying them
into the noterbook .
* Key :
125
 1. Japan
2. Vietnam ,
3. Iceland
4 .the USA
5. Finland
6. Britain
Act 2: Do you agree with the following
statements ?
-Ask SS to discuss and talk freely - SS discuss and talk freely
Ask Ss to read the questions and answer - Then work in pair to read and answer
the questions the questions aloud .
- Ask Ss some more questions to check -SS answer some more questions
their knowledge
Act 3 a : Read about two famous TV
programmes for children . - Read about two famous TV
- Ask SS to read and use it as a model for programmes for children .
their talk about their favorite programme - Ss read and use it as a model for their
talk about their favorite programme .
After finishing reading , ask Ss to return to
-Return to Act 2 and see if they want to
Act 2 and see if they want to change any
change any of their previous answers .
of their previous answers
Act 3 a : Read the facts in the table and - Ss read the texts again then answer the
tick the correct programmes . questions .
- Let Ss read the texts while they - Copy the answer key .
answer the questions . 1. Both programmes .
- Give the answer key . 2. Let’s learn
3. Hello Fatty !
IV. Production 4.Let’s learn
Act 4 : Work in group 5. Hello Fatty !
6.Let’s learn
Allow SS about 2-3 minutes to choose the
- SS choose the programme they prefer
programme they prefer and prepare for
and prepare for their speaking .
their speaking .
- Try to focus on explaining why they like
- Encourage ss to focus on explaining why
it .
they like it .
V. Home work. Learn the new words
- -Review the lesson.
-Summarize the main points of the lesson.. -Prepare skill 1.
* Adjustment:
126
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................

Date of planning: 11/1/2015

Date of teaching: 13/ 1/ 2015
Period 61
UNIT 7 TELEVISION
Lesson 4 Skills 1 + Project

I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to : - Read a TV schedule for specific information.
- Talk about a favorite TV programme .
II. Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III.Procedures :
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
I . Warm up: One Student talk about the programme
* Guessing game : he/she likes watching then all the class try
Ask one student to talk about the to guess “What programme is it ?” .
programme he/she likes watching then ask
all the class try to guess “What programme
is it ?” .

II. New lesson :

1. Teaching vocab 1. Vocabulary :

- Teacher uses different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, realia) documentary : Phim tài liệu

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. Pacific : Thái bình dương
instructor :Huấn luyện viên .

compete : đua

Jungle : Rừng nhiệt đơi

* Checking vocab: Slap the board
Knowledge : Sự hiểu biết

127
 Discover : Khám phá

universe : Vũ Trụ

A. Reading:

Activity1 :Read the schedule for around Read the schedule

the world !

Ask Ss to read the schedule .

- Read the schedule again then answer the
T asks Ss to read the schedule again then questions about the time , the name of the
answer the questions about the time , the programme , and its content
name of the programme , and its content .

-T asks Ss to note where they found the

information that helped them to answer the
questions.

-Ss can compare their answers with their

partners.

-T corrects the answers: 2. Anwer the questions:

Act ivity 2 : Answer the following Ss scan the schedule again and find the
questions about the schedule : information to answer

_ Have Ss scan the schedule again and * Key:

find the information to answer .
1/ Wheelbarrow Race
_ Ss note where they found the
information and compare with their 2/ The Porrot Instructor .
partners.
3/ Yes , we can .
_ Feedback: 2 Ss write on the board.
4/ A doccumentary about the colourful
_ T checks and corrects it . world in the Pacific .

5/ No, it isn’t .

Activity 3 : Read the information about

the people below and choose the best

128
programme for each .
- Ask Ss to work in group 4 to do this - Ss work in group 4 :
activity .
- T goes around the class to help Ss if -Read the information about the people
necessary . below and choose the best programme for
- T checks and corrects then give the each .
answer key .
Key :

1. Phong : Science : Journey to Jupiter.

2. Bob : Comedy : The Parrot Instructor

3. Nga : Game show : Children are

Always Right .

4. Minh : sport : Wheelbarrow Races .

5. Linh : Animal : Ocean Life

B. Speaking:

* Activity 4 : Work in group 4 : -Tell the group about the favorite TV

programme . The talk should include the
Ask students to tell the group about their following information .
favorite TV programme . Their talk should
include the following information : Try to explain the reason They like it

Encourage ss to focus on explaining why

they like it .
- My favourite programme is ………
The name of the the channel it is on - The name of the programme is ……….
programme - It’s on ……………..channel.
- It’s about………………(content)
- I like it because ……….
The content of The reason you
progrramme like it

T reviews the expressions they can use to

talk .

C. Project “How important is TV to you?”

- SS answer the questions below Then
129
- Ask Ss to work in groups. report their results to the class.
- Ss interview their friends, using the 1. What do you prefer doing in your free
questions given in the textbook. time?
2. How many hours a day do you watch
television?
3. Why do you watch TV?
4. Which of the following do you like to
get information from?
5. How long do you think you can live
without TV?
III. Homework: -Review the lesson.

Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the -Prepare skills 2.

lesson and prepare skills 2.

..........................................................................................................................................

130
Making date: 11/1/2015
Teaching date:14/1/2015
PERIOD 62

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
LESSON 6: SKILLs 2: LISTENING - WRITING

I. Objectives:
- Listening for specific information from a recommended TV schedule .
- Writing a short guided passage about one’s TV- watching habits .
II. Teaching aids: - Computer ,Posters, cassette.
III. Proceduces :

131
 Teacher’ activities Teacher’s activities
I. WARM-UP: Network

- Ss work in 2 teams. News

- Check and correct TV programmes

II. NEW LESSON 1. Vocabulary :

A. Listening. Spend : trải qua , dành
Compare : so sánh
* Pre – listening : outdoor : ngoài trời
-Present some new words. turn off : tắt
- Teacher uses different techniques to habit : thói quen .
teach vocab (situation, realia) squirrel : con sóc
Giraffe : con hươu
- Follow the seven steps of teaching comment : lời bình luận .
vacab. * Vocabulary checking : R.O.R

* Checking vocab: Rub out and - Read the schedule aloud

remmember.
Activity 1 .
Listen and check the correct channel
for each programme . -Listen to the recording twice
-Ask ss to read the schedule aloud . -Focus on the information they need .
- Ss listen and tick the correct channel for
* While – listening : each programme . Share their answer
- Have Ss listen to the recording twice . together
- Ask Ss to only focus on the information - check answer key :
they need 1. Music : Channel 1
2. Cartoon : Channel 2
3. Film : Channel 3
4.Home and garden : Channel 2
- T checks and corrects then give the 5. Our Heritage : Channel 3
answer key
2. Listen again and tick statements 1 – 5
with T or F
Key:
1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F

* Post – listening :
- Play the recording again and ask Ss to
check statememts 1-5 .
- Ask SS to take notes about the time for
each programme and use them as
reference
B. Writing 132
3. What are your TV – watching habit?
- Let each S read the questionnaire and * Suggested structure:
..........................................................................................................................................

Making date: 18/1/2015

Teaching date:19/1/2015
PERIOD 63

Unit 7: TELEVISION
Lesson : 7 Looking back

I. Objectives :
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review:
+ lexical items rerated to television.
+ conjunctions (and, but, because,.) and question words (where, who, why, ….)
+ conversations about a TV programme.
* Teaching aids: posters, cassette and tape.
II. Teaching steps.
Teacher ‘s activities Students' activities
I. WARM-UP .
- Ask 2 – 3 Ss come to the board and “What are your TV – watching habits?”
talk about their TV – watching habits.
- Give remarks and marks.
II. NEW LESSON: 1. Put the words in the box in the correct
A Vocabulary: columns. Add more words if you can.
1. Put the words in the box in the
correct columns. Add more words if - Write the words the draff individually and
you can. then share their answer with their partners
- Tell Ss to write the words the draff Key:
individually and then share their answer 1. People: newsreader, weatherman,
with their partners, writer, MC
T corrects their mistakes then give the 2. Programme: cartoon, game show,
answer key. animals, home and garden.
- Let Ss repeat the words. 3. Kinds of film: documentary, romance
- Check Ss’ pronunciation.
2. Use the words in the box to fill the
text. 2. Use the words in the box to fill the
text.
- Ask Ss read the text carefully and -Read the text carefully and complete them
complete them with the words in the with the words in the box.
box.
- Remind Ss that the words, phrases and
133
sentences before and after the blanks Key:
will provide the context for them to 1. national 2. viewers
choose the correct words. 3. 7 o’clock news 4. Comedies
5. relax 6. Game show
B. Grammar 7. educational 8. Writers
3. Use a question word to make a
suitable for each answer. 3. Use a question word to make a
suitable for each answer.
- Ask Ss to look at the answers and Ss look at the answers and decide which
decide which question words is to be question words is to be used.
used.
- Call some Ss to give their answers. Key:
- Give corrections if necessary. 1. How many 2. What
3. Why 4. Who 5. When
4. Use the conjunction provided to
connect the sentences. 4. Use the conjunction provided to
- Let Ss do the task separately connect the sentences.
- Comment and check Ss’ answers then Ss do the task separately :
give the key . Key: 1. Ocean Life is on at 7.30 and
Laughing out Loud will follow, at 8.00
2. I have watched The Seven Kitties many
times because I like the film so much.
3. BBC One is a British channel but VTV 6
is Vietnamese channel.
4. Although Along The Coast is a famous
TV series, I have never watched it.
5. I have a lot of homework tonight, so I
C. Communication can’t watch Eight Feet Below.
5. Rearrange the order of the 5. Rearrange the order of the sentences
sentences to have a complete to have a complete conversation about a
conversation about a TV programme. TV programme.
- Ask Ss to work in pair and reorder the
conversation.
- Call some pairs to check and correct. -Ss work in pair to reorder the conversation
- Ask some pairs to practice reading Key:
aloud to check their pronunciation. A C B D F H G E I K

III. HOMEWORK. - Ss rewrite the correct order conversation

- Summarize the main point of the in 5 in their notebooks
lesson. - Prepare Getting started – Unit 8
- Assign home work.

134
Making date: 18/1/2015
Teaching date:20/1/2015
PERIOD 64
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 1: Getting started
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Understand activities at the gym, review vocabs about school things and use the
combinations: go, play, do + N/V-ing.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warm up (5’): Network
Network: Programmes on TV
Film Sports
(?) Who can give me some programmes on Programmes
TV? on TV

Games News

B. NEW LESSON B. NEW LESSON

Vocabulary (5’) * Vocabulary
- Present new words. + gym /ʤim/: trung tâm thể dục
+ equipment /i'kwipmənt/: thiết bị, dụng
cụ
+ congratulation/kən,grætju'leiʃn/ : sự
chúc mừng
- Check: Rub out and Remember. + fit (a): mạnh khỏe

135
 + ski /ski:/: trượt tuyết-> skiing: môn …
+ useful (a)/'ju:sful/: có ích
+ waste (v):/weist/: lãng phí
- Get Ss to read and check new words. - Take notes
Listen and read (30’) 1. Listen and read: At the gym
- Show the picture ( Ask Ss to look at the - Look at the picture and answer the
picture on P16), then give Ss some questions: questions
+ Who do you see in the picture ?
+ Where are they ? What do you think they’re
talking about ?
- Ask Ss to guess what it shows or what the - Guess
conversation between Duong and Mai might
be about. - Listen to the tape
- Plays the recording twice.
- Call Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs - Pairs work
a) Ask Ss to work independently or in pairs to a) Answer the questions independently
answer the questions. or in pairs
Keys:
1. He can play table tennis and do karate.
2. Mai is
3. Because the equipment is modern and
the people are friendly.
- Check their answer and give the feedback. 4. Duong played with Duy and won ( for
the first time).
5. At the karate club.
b) Colloquial expression:/kə'loukwiəl/: Sự b) Colloquial expression:
biểu cảm thông thường. - Pay much attention to the lesson.
- Refer Ss to the conversation to find the Key: 1. Wow: used to express surprise.
phrases. 2. Congratulation: used to congratule sb/
- Play the recording again if necessary, then to tell sb that you are pleased about their
ask Ss to practise saying them together. success
3. Great: used to show admiration.
4. See you (then): used when you say
- Explain or give the synonyms to the Ss, then goodbye.
give some examples. c) Make dialogue with the expressions.
c) Make dialogue with the expressions. A: Congratulation! You’ve won the first
- Direct Ss to practise the short conversations prize on English speaking contest.
in pairs before creating their short-role plays. B: Thank you.
C: Great! You did very well.
D: …….
2, Listen and repeat these words and
2, Listen and repeat these words and phrases:
136
phrases:
- Play the recording
- Let Ss listen and repeat. Check and correct - Listen and repeat the words
their pronunciation. Give them the meaning of
the words.
- Ask Ss if these sports and games are played 3, Name these sports and games.
in Viet Nam.
3, Name these sports and games. Keys:
- Ask Ss to write the correct words in the 1. cycling 2. table tennis
spaces. 3. running 4. swimming
- Check their doings and give the feedback. 5. chess 6. skiing
- Help Ss to distinguish between a sport and a - Give some examples:
game: A sport: baseball, volleyball, soccer,
A sport: an activity that you do for pleasure skiing….
and that you need physical exercise. A game: chess, …
A game: an activity or a sport with rules in 4, Put the words from 2 in the correct
which people or teams compete against each groups:
other. Key:
Play: chess, table tennis, volleyball,
4, Put the words from 2 in the correct tennis
groups: Do: boxing, aerobics, karate
Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running,
- Let Ss work in pairs and put the words in the skiing.
correct group. 5. Put the correct form of the verbs
- Check the Ss’answers, then give the play, do, go, watch and like in the
feedback. blanks.

5. Put the correct form of the verbs play, do, Key:

go, watch and like in the blanks. 1. do 2. is watching 3. goes
- Allow Ss time to do the task individually. 4. likes 5. played
- Call Ss to write their answer on the board and 6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner
ask the class to comment and give them the these questions to find out how sporty
correct answers. they are.
6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner these - Work in pairs or groups asking and
questions to find out how sporty they are. answering the questions.
- Let Ss work in pairs or groups asking and
answering the questions.
- Move around the class to help / encourage Ss - Some pairs to demonstrate their results
to do their task. in front of the class.
- Call some pairs to demonstrate their results
in front of the class.

137
Consolidation (3') - Answer individually
? What is the topic of the lesson today?

Homework(2’)
- Ask Ss to review vocabulary about sports and - Learn by heart new vocabulary
games. - Practice reading “Listen and read”
- Prapare the next lesson - Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.
……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Making date: 18/1/2015

Teaching date:21/1/2015
PERIOD 65
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Pronounce the sounds /eə / and /iə/ correctly in isolation and in context and use lexical items
related to the topic “Sports and Games”
- Training reading, speaking skills.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Warm up (5’): Warm up. Network

Network: Sports and Games Cycling
Who can give me some sports and games? Chess Sports &
- Introduce the new lesson. Games

I. Vocabulary (15') Running

138
1. Teaching vocab Karate
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach */ New words.
vocab (situation, realia) - boat: con thuyền
- goggles /'gɔglz/ (n): kính bơi
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - skateboard (n,v): ván trượt, trượt ván
* Checking vocab: Slap the board - racket /'rækit/ (n): cái vợt
1. Listen and repeat the words. - sphere/sfiə/ : hình cầu, quả cầu
Ask Ss to look at the pictures on p18 - Checking vocab: Slap the board
- Play the recording and let Ss listen 1. Listen and repeat the words.
? Listen and read then check your answer.
- Play it again and pause for them to repeat each - Listen and repeat the words.
word.
2. Now write the words under the pictures.
? - Ask Ss to work in groups.
2. Now write the words under the
pictures.
? - Ask them to share answers with other groups. Ss work in groups to write the words/
phrases in the box under the pictures
KEY
- Teacher gets feedback 1- a bicycle 2- a ball
3- sports shoes 4- skis
5- a boat 6- a racquet
3. What sports are these things for? Match the 7- a skateboard 8- goggles
things in column A with a sport/game in - Ss work individually
column B. 3. What sports are these things for?
- Ask Ss to do the task independently first. Match the things in column A with a
sport/game in column B.
- Call Ss to write their answers on the board, KEY
then check 1-c 2- d 3- a 4-e
II. Pronunciation (15') 5- g 6- h 7- b 8- f
- Explain how to pronounce the two sounds / eə
/ and /iə /. II. Pronunciation (15')

? Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds - Listen to the teacher
4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the - Ss work in groups
sounds / eə / and /iə /. - Ss share answers with other groups.
- Asks Ss to practice sounding out the sound 4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number the sounds / eə / and /iə /.
the words in the order they hear. - Practice sounding out the sound
- Play the recording again and ask the Ss to 1. / eə /: where, there, fair, pair,
repeat. prepare
5. Read the words and say them aloud. Which 2. /iə /: here, fear, nearly, idea,
139
one has / eə / or /iə /. volunteer.
- Play the tape twice
? Work individually to put the words into two 5. Read the words and say them
groups. aloud. Which one has / eə / or /iə /.
? Check your answers in groups. - Listen to the tape
- Have two students write on the board. Key:
- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary. 1.A 2.C 3.B
III. Production ( 6') 4.A 5.B 6.A
6. Listen to the sentences and choose the right
words.
- Play the recroding
? Ask the Ss to repeat sentence by sentence. 6. Listen to the sentences and choose
the right words.
- Practice sounding out the sound
- Help Ss recognize the two sounds, then
/ eə / and /iə / together
underline the words in the sentences.
- Listen and repeat
Key:
IV. Consolidation (2')
1. fair 2. hear 3. ida
? How to make the sounds / eə / and /iə /.
4. square 5. nearly 6.
? Find some more words that have these two
cheere
sounds
- Listen and take turns reading the
.V. Homework (2')
sentence.
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
- Answer the question.
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2

- Do as directed

Making date: 25/1/2015

Teaching date:26/1/2015
140
PERIOD 66
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 3: A CLOSER LOOK 2
A. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss can review the past simple tense and do exercises and this tense.
- Ss can use imperatives to tell sb to do st or to give a direct order.
B. Content:
- Grammar: Past simple tense ( Regular and irregular verbs )
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
2. Warm up. Pelnalism:
- Write the past form of these verbs:
make take go play visit - Answer the questions.

played visited made went

took
2. Presentation.
Past Simple tense: - Review Past simple tense:
- We use the Past Simple tense to talk aboutt (+) S + Ved / 2 + ...
a finished action in the past. We often say (-) S + didn’t + V + .....
when it happened. (?) Did + S + V + ....?
Notes: Yes, S + did
* Regular verbs: V+ed No, S + didn’t
* Irregualr verbs: V2 ( was, were, had,
went....)
3. Practice.
1. Complete the sentences with did, was or 1. Complete the sentences with did,
were was or were
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to give the answers. KEY
- Help / Observe Ss when necessary and 1- were
correct Ss’ mistakes. 2- was
3- was- did- was
- Teacher gives feedback 4- Did –were-did-was
2. Write the correct form of the verbs to 2. Write the correct form of the verbs
complete the conversation. to complete the conversation.
? - Ask Ss to work individually. - Ss work individually.
- Correct their answers and may call on some - Read the conversation with the correct
Ss separately to say their answers for the verbs forms and pronunciation and
141
class. intonation.
- Give explanation when necessary Keys:
? - Ask Ss to read the conversation with the 1. was 2. didn’t do
correct verbs forms. Correct their 3. sat 4. watched 5. went
pronunciation and intonation. 6. had 7. did 8. visited
9. ate 10. scored
3. Work in group. Ask and answer 3. Work in group. Ask and answer
questions anout last weekend. questions anout last weekend.
- T divides the class into 4 or 5 groups. Ss
take turns asking and answering questions
about their last weekend. Some more able Ss Example:
can report to the class about one of their S1: Did you play any sports last
friends. weekend?
- T can ask Ss to give the rule for using each S2: Yes, and I enjoyed myself so much.
of the tenses they have learnt. T writes S1: Really? What did you do ?
Ss’rules down on the board. Then T tells Ss S2: I .................
that they are going to learn one more tense.
Imperatives: Imperatives:
- T tells Ss the form and the use of
imperatives and give some examples.
Form: (+) V + .....
(-) Don’t + V + ..... - Pay much attention to the teacher.
-> Used to ask someone to do something, or
to give a direct order. - take notes
4. Write sentences to tell your friends what 4. Write sentences to tell your friends
to do or not to do. what to do or not to do.
- ? Ss work individually, write their answers KEY
1- Take your umbrella.
2- Please don’t litter.
- Call Ss to read aloud their answers 3- Please hurry up.
4- ...don’t train too hard.
- Correct mistakes if necessary. 5- Put on your coat.
5. Tell your friends what to do or not to do 5. Work in pairs or groups.
at the gym. KEY
- Let Ss work in pairs or in groups, take turns - Pay your fee first
telling their friends what to do and not to do - Put on your trainers / sports shoes.
at the gym. - Listen to the instructor carefully.
- Help Ss and let them give as many - Don’t litter.
sentences as possible. - Don’t eat or drink at the gym.
- T can go around the class and explain the - Don’t speak and laugh loudly.
students how to do. Then give the correct ....................
answers and ask Ss to check
142
 4. Production.( Further Practice)
? If there is time, let Ss take turns giving an
order or telling their friends to do an activity - Do as directed.
and act out the order.
5. Home work.
- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the - Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
textbook. Prepare the new lesson. the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.

……………………………………………………………………………………………..

Making date: 25/1/2015

Teaching date:27/1/2015
PERIOD 67
- UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 4: Communication

A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Read the new vocabulary.
- Understand about the five rings represent the five major regions of the World.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
I. Warm up: * Chatting
* Chatting: S1 : What is your favorite sport ?
Ask Ss to ask and answer about their favorite S2 : ....................................................
sports.
S1: Do you like football ?
S2 :......................................................
S1: How often is the O.Games held ?
143
 S2 :......................................................
II. New lesson. 1/ New words:
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach - fit (a): mạnh khỏe
vocab (situation, explaination ) - last (v): kéo dài
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
- marathon /'mærəθən/: chạy maratông
- Explain the 5 interlocked rings: The five
rings represent the five major regions of the - ring (n): vòng tròn
World ( Africa, the America, Asia, Europe - achievement(n): thành tích, thành tựu
and Oceania) and every national flag in the
world has at least one of the five colors - Pay much attention to the teacher.
( blue, yellow, black, greeen, and red)
* Vocabulary checking: R.O.R
III: Practice:
Act1: Sports quiz. Work in pairs. Do the * Vocabulary checking : R.O.R
quiz.
Act1: Complete the facts below with the
name of the correct country .
- Ss work in pairs and find the answers to
- Ask Ss to work in pairs and find the the quizzes.
answers to the quizzes. * Key:
1. There are usually 22 players (11 on each
side)
- Give the correct answers. 2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (divide into
2 halves)
3. They are held every four years
4 . No, there weren’t Olympic Games in
2011. (They were held in 004,2008,2012...
5. A marathon is 42,195 kilometer long (26
miles and 385 yards)
6. They were held in Olympia (in Ancient
Greece in 776 BC)
7. Boxing does.
Act 2: In pairs, interview your partner Act 2: interview your partner using the
using the following questions. Ask for following questions. Ask for more
more information. information.
- Ask SS to work in pairs to do the task. - Work in pairs to do the task. Ask and
Ask and answer the questions answer the questions
Possible answers:
1. I often play....
144
 2. I play badminton, soccer, shutlle cock..
3. I like watching sports show like
- Encourage Ss to talk and raise as many football match, tennis/ badminton...
4. Ss’answer
questions as possible.
5. Yes, I’d like to learn to play.....
6. Name famous sportspersons:
Footballer: C.Ronaldo, Messi, N.C.
Vinh
Tennis player: Federa, Nadan, William
Act 3: Think of a sportsman/ sportwoman Act 3: Think of a sportsman/
you like. Talk about him/ her with a sportwoman you like. Talk about him/
her with a partner. Using the cues.
partner. Using the cues.
- Work in groups of four or five.
- Divide the class into groups of four or five,
encourage Ss to talk about their favorite
sportsperson one by one. Using these
questions:
+ What is his / her name?
- Talk about the sportsperson they like by
+What sport does he/ she play?
answering these questions:
+What were her/ his last achievements ?
+ Why do you like him/ her?
IV. Production:
- Encourage ss to speak about their favorite
- Ss speak about their favorite
sportsperson they like in front of the class.
sportsperson they like in front of the class.
V. Home work. - Learn the new words
- Summarize the main points of the lesson. - Review the lesson.
- Prepare skill 1

Making date: 25/1/2015

Teaching date:28/1/2015
PERIOD 68
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 5: SKILLS 1
145
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Read for specific information about famous sportsperson “The King of Football”.
- Talk about the activities/ sports / games they do in their spare time.
B. Content:
- Adverbs of frequency
- How often….?
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
I . Warm up:
* Guessing game: One Student talk about the sportsperson he/she
Ask one student to talk about the likes watching then all the class try to guess
sportsperson he/she likes , then ask all the “Who is this in the picture ?”.
class try to guess “Who is this in the
picture ?”
II. New lesson: Vocabulary:
- regard /ri'gɑ:d/: quan tâm, kính trọng
1. Teaching vocab - professional: chuyên nghiệp
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach - score (v) ghi bàn
vocab (situation, realia) - vote (v): bầu
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - well-known (a): nổi tiếng
* Checking vocab: Slap the board * Checking vocab: Slap the board
A. Reading:
1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions: 1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions:
- Ask Ss to dicuss the questions in pairs. - Dicuss the questions in pairs.
Encourage them to give their ideas as Suggested answers:
many as possible. 1. Yes, I do. He is regarded as the King of
Football.
2. He comes from Brazil.
3. He won the first World Cup when he was
17.
2: Read the text quickly to check your 2: Read the text quickly to check your ideas
ideas in 1. in 1.
- Have Ss scan the text again and check
the ideas in 1. - Ss scan the text again and check the ideas in
- Ss note where they found the information 1.
and compare with their partners.
- Feedback: 2 Ss write on the board.
146
- T checks and corrects it.
3: Read again and answer the questions.
- Ask Ss to read the text again and find the 3: Read again and answer the questions.
information to answer. - Read the information about Pele and answer
the questions:
- T goes around the class to help Ss if Key:
necessary. 1. He was born on 21st October 1940.
2. People call him “The King of Football ”
because he is such a good football player.
- T checks and corrects then gives the 3. He became Football Player of the Century
answer key. in 1999.
4. He scored 1,281 goals in total.
5. Yes, he is.
B. Speaking 4. How often do you go/do/play these
4. How often do you go/do/play these sports/games? Tick the right column:
sports/games? Tick the right column: - Read the table and tick the right column.
Sports/ alwa usual some neve
Games ys ly times r
1. Jogging
2. Swimming
3. Badminton
- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick 5. Football
the right column. 6. Morning
exercise
7. Skipping
8. Chess
9. Cycling
10.Skateboard
ing
11.Skiing
5. Work in groups. What kind of
sports/games do you do most often? 5. Work in groups. What kind of
Why? sports/games do you do most often? Why?
- Ask students to work in groups to ask and
answer the question. They should refer the -Work in groups of 4 or 5 and discuss their
information in table 4.
answers to the questions.
- Encourage Ss to focus on explaining why
they like it.
6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the 6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the
following questions. following questions.
- Divide the class into groups of 4 or 5. Let - Call Ss to report their results to the class.
147
them discuss their answers to the Suggested answers:
questions. 1. Yes, I do / No, I don’t
Report the results to the class. 2. I play football / I only watch it.
3. I play …; No, I’ve just played it for a few
- When Ss finish, ask one student from
days.
each group “ What is the most interesting 4. Yes, I do / No, I don’t
thing you learnt from your discussion?” 5. I often read books in the library./ I……
III. Homework:
- Ask Ss to summarize the main point of - Review the lesson.
the lesson and prepare skills 2. - Prepare skills 2.

Making date: 1/2/2015

Teaching date:2/2/2015
PERIOD 69
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
A. Objectives:
148
 Sports / Games

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

- Listening to get information about the sports/ games people play.
- Writing a paragraph about the sport/ game they like.
B. Content: Listening and writing
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher’ activities Students' activities
I. WARM-UP: Network
(?) Can you tell me the names of TV
programmes? jogging
- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct

II. NEW LESSON

A. Listening. 1. Vocabulary:
* Pre - listening: - create (v) /kri:'eit/ : tạo ra
- Present some new words. - hobby = interest: sở thích
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach - to be good/ bad at: giỏi / kém về
vocab (situation, realia) * Vocabulary checking : R.O.R
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Rub out and remmember. Activity 1.
* While – listening: - Listen to the recording once only.
Activity 1. - Focus on the information they need.
Listen to the pasage. Who are they about? Key:
1, Hai 2, Alice 3, Bill 4, Trung
- Play the recording once only. Ask Ss to listen Activity 2.
and say who the passage are about. - Ss listen and write T or F for each
sentence. Share their answer together
2. Listen to the pasage again. Then write T - check answer key:
or F for each sentence. 1-F 2-T 3-T 4-F 5-T
- Have Ss listen to the recording twice.
- Ask Ss to only focus on the information they
need.
- T checks and corrects then give the answer Activity 3.
key - Listen to the tape again and fill in the
* Post – listening: blank.
3. Listen to the pasage again. Fill in each - Key:
blank to complete the sentences. 1. Club 2. Play 3. Watching
- Play the recording again and ask Ss to fill in
149
each blank to complete the sentences 4. Bill 5. goes
- Check Ss’answers and give the feedback.
B. Writing Brainstorming:
Pre-writing: Braistorming
- Write things related to sports/ games they
like:
Name, team/individual sport, time, player,
equipment.

- Allow Ss to refer to the reading and other - Pay much attention to the lesson
sections for useful language. Note interesting
expressions and language on the board. - Write draft first, Ss should use the cues
- Tell Ss to write draft first, Ss should use the and their own ideas.
Sports/Games
cues and their own ideas.
you like
While-writing:
Write about a sport/ game you like. Use
your own ideas and the following as cues - Look at the suggested questions for the
- Help Ss organize their ideas for writing. writing.
- Ask Ss to look at the suggested questions for - Write a paragraph of about 80-100
the writing. words about the sport / game they like,
- Encourage Ss to write a paragraph of about covering as many ideas as possible.
80-100 words about the sport / game they like,
covering as many ideas as possible. - Pay special attention to punctuation,
- Ask Ss to pay special attention to structural elements, linking words.
punctuation, structural elements, linking
words.
Post-writing:
- Collect one or some Ss’writing papers and - Correct mistakes if necessary.
mark them, then give comments to the class.
III. HOMEWORK - Ss edit and revise their writing as
- Summarize the main point of the lesson. homework.
- Assign home work. - Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
Adjustment:
……………………………………………………………………………………………

Making date: 1/2/2015

Teaching date:3/2/2015
PERIOD 70
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK + PROJECT
A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review:
150
 + lexical items related to sports / games.
+ Past simple tense and imperatives
+ Games: “Blind man’s bluff.”
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
I. WARM-UP
What is your favourite sport / game?
- Ask 2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk 2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk about
about their favourite sport/ game. their favourite sport/ game.
- Give remarks and marks.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Find one odd word or phrase in each 1. Find one odd word or phrase in each
line. line.
- Tell Ss to find the words individually and - Find the words individually and then
then share their answer with their partners, share their answer with their partners
T corrects their mistakes then give the answer
key.
- Let Ss repeat the words. Key:
- Check Ss’ pronunciation. 1.C 2.A 3.D 4.C 5.B
2. Read the four words in each line. Write 2. Read the four words in each line.
the name of the game or sport the four Write the name of the game or sport the
words belong to. four words belong to.
- Ask Ss repeat the words . - Repeat the words .
- Check Ss’ pronunciation. - Write the answers in the notebooks.
Key:
- Tell Ss to write the answers in the 1. cycling 2. Football
notebooks. 3. boxing 4. Table tennis
- Correct mistakes. 5. basketball
B. Grammar
3. Put the verbs in the brackets in the 3. Put the verbs in the brackets in the
correct form. correct form.
- Ask Ss to supply the correct form of the - Supply the correct form of the verbs in
verbs in the brackets. the brackets
151
- Call some Ss to give their answers. Key:
1. are 2. Took 3. Started
- Give corrections if necessary. 4. are playing 5. Did you do- cycled -
watched
4. What did you say in these situations ? 4. What did you say in these situations ?
Ss do the task separately:
- Let Ss do the task in pairs or groups to Key:
finish or write the sentence 1. Please stop making noise.
2. Go out to play with your friends.
- Comment and check Ss’ answers then give 3. Don’t feed the animals.
the key. 4. Stand in line, boys!
5. Don’t tease the dog.
5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish 5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish
the pasage. the pasage.
- Ask Ss to do the task individually first. They - Do the task individually. Check the
they can check their answers with their answers with their partners before
partners before discussing the answers as a discussing.
class. - Read the whole passage.
- Give corrections. 1. play 2. Hear 3. Games
- Have some Ss read the whole passage aloud 4. sports 5. famous
C. Communication
6. Match the questions in A with their 6. Match the questions in A with their
correct answers in B. correct answers in B.
- Ask Ss to read the question and answers - Read the question and answers once or
once or twice. Then match them. twice. Then match them.
- Ask Ss to work in pair and role-play the - Work in pair and role-play the question
question and answers. and answers.
- Ask some pairs to complete the self- Key:
assessment. Identify any difficulties/ weak 1-a 2-e 3-b 4-c 5- d
areas and provide further practice as needed.
D. Project.
1. Read the passage about the game “Blind 1. Read the passage about the game “Blind
man’s bluff” man’s bluff”
- T guides Ss to play this game. - Listen to the teacher.
- Explain new words and anything difficult - Work in groups to play a game.
for Ss. Make sure they understand everything
throughly.
New words:
- blindfold : người bị bịt mắt
- touch (v): đụng, chạm
- hint: gợi ý nhỏ
- Let Ss work in groups to play game. - Do as directed.
152
III. HOMEWORK.
- Summarize the main point of the lesson. - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask Ss to Prepare Getting started – U9 - Prepare Getting started - Unit 8

Making date: 1/2/2015

Teaching date:4/2/2015
PERIOD 71

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD

Lesson 1 : Getting started ( WHAT NICE PHOTOS)
153
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss name some continents,countries,cities and lanmarks in English such as: north and
sound america,europe...
- Understand the content of the dialogue between Mai and Tom and do excercises well.
- Ss can talk sth about continents,countries,cities and lanmarks.
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES :

154
 T’s activities. T Students’ activities
Warm up: 3’
T asks Sts
Have you ever been to Brazil?
Do you know about Rio de Janeiro capital? 4.
CWhere is the Big Ben? on
s I.Vocabulary. 7’ Sts look at picture oli
dT use picture to present new words ati
o 1. continent : ( n) : lục địa n(
3 2. country :( n):đất nươc,quốc gia Listen to T’s eliciting then ’):
3. Antarctica(n): Nam cực gives new words
4.Africa : châu phi
5.South America: (n) Nam Mỹ Read in chorus
6.North America:(n) Bắc Mỹ Read individually
7.Europe(n):Châu Âu
8.Asia(n):Châu Á
9.Australia(n):Châu Úc
5. be (v): : been ( pII)
6. photo (n) : bức ảnh (realial)
*Revise some adjs: hot, cold,
clean,big,modern,great….
Name the continents 5’ Go to board to match
* Check vocab using “the pictures E3” Copy
Ask sts to match
Ask sts to copy in note books
II. The dialogue : Listen to T and answer
Task 1.
- T asks sts to listen to the dialouge twice on 10’
page 26 and answer the questions :
Sts practise in pairs
Asks sts to read the dialouge Answer T or F
- T/F statements Do part a in pairs
Asks to read the dialogue again and do part 2- * Keys for part 2:
P27 1.F( They are looking at…)
2.F (most of cities)
- Asks sts to read the dialogue again to do the 3.T
the T/F . Practise saying them together 4.F(There are more modern..)
5.F( never been to NY)

Task 2. Matching -answer T’qs

T guides Sts to do ex - Do matching
a.continent Keys
b.coutry 7’ a.Asia, Africa
c.city b.sweden, the USA
d.capital c. Ha noi ,Nha Trang,…
e.place of interest 155 d.Ha noi,Amsterdam
get feedback e.Ben Thanh Market,The
1-Ha Noi lourve
 - What have you learnt today?
- What’s the difference between continent , a country, a city ,….?
5. Homework(2’):
- Asks sts to learn Voc by heart.
- Do ex A in workbook .

Making date: 1/2/2015

Teaching date:9/2/2015
PERIOD 72
156
 UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 2 : A CLOSER LOOK 1
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher’s activities Students' activities

Warm-up: Kim’s game (5’)
- Devide the class into 2 teams Adj:
- Show the adjectives on the screen in 30 Old, dangerous, quiet, dry, clean,
seconds and asks ss to remember historic, boring, cheap, cold, safe,
- Which team remembers more words will dirty, wet, polluted, new, exciting, hot,
be the winner. modern, expensive, noisy.
Eleciting:
I. Vocabulary: (10’)
1. Match the words in A with their
opposite in B. Some words may have Key:
more than one opposite. Old- new, dangerous – safe, quiet –
- Ask Ss to match the words they know in noisy, dry – wet, boring- exciting,
pairs. clean – dirty, historic – modern, cheap
- point out that some adj in the left column – expensive, cold – hot.
can have more than one opposites in the
right column.
- Give feedback.
- Have Ss practice reading the adj.
2. Create word webs Key:
- Have Ss work in groups City: beautiful, peaceful, exciting,
- Tell them they can use the words in 1. modern, big, polutted, safe
- Encourage ss to add other adj. People: nice, friendly, unfriendly,
- Give feedback. Point out that some adj open, noisy, interesting
can’t go with particular nouns Food: delicious, awful, good, tasty
Weather: bad, rainy, hot, cold, wet

157
II. Pronunciation (10’) Building: old, modern, tall, new
3. Listen and write the words you hear in
the appropriate column. Then, read the
words aloud. / Əu / : cold, snow, old, clothes, hold
- Practice the Sound / Əu / and /ai / /ai /: sky, exciting, high, fine, flight
together. Model the two sounds with cold
and sky.
- Let ss see how the sounds are formed.
- Ask Ss to give words that have these two
sounds. Play the recording and ask Ss to
listen and fill in the suitable column. Play
the recording as many times as necessary.
- Give feedback and have ss repeat the
sounds as a class.
4. Listen and repeat.
- Have Ss practice reading in bold first.
- Ask them to say if the word has an / Əu /
or /ai / sound.
- Have ss repeat the sentences.
- Providing further practice by dividing the
class into two groups. Have groups read
alternate lines.
III. Grammar ( 15’)
Superlatives of long adjectives Key:
5. Complete the fact sheet by choosing 1. London
one picture... 2. Oxford uni.
- Let ss have a quick look at all the pictures. 3. Shakespeare
Ask ss to work individually to complete the 4. fish and chips
fact sheet, using one of the pictures 5. tea
provided. 6. watching tv
- Have Ss work in pairs compare the
answers. Ask them to discuss whether they
agree with each other’s answers.
6. Read this article about Britain.
- Ask Ss to look at their earlier answers in
ex 5 to check if they are similar to what the
text says.
- Have Ss ask and answer questions about
the fact using most + adj
7. Consolidation (3')
? How to make the sounds / Əu / and /ai /
? Find some more words that have these
158
two sounds
.V. Homework (2')
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2.

159
Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:10/2/2015
PERIOD 73
UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher’s activities Students' activities

Warmer (5'): Slap the board
- Elicit some words form Ss - Old, dangerous, quiet, dry, clean,
- Teacher divides the class into two teams. historic, boring, cheap, cold, safe,
? Go to the board, listen to the teacher and dirty, wet, polluted, new, exciting, hot,
slap on the correct words. modern, expensive, noisy.
- Teacher gets feedback
-> Today we are going to learn about school - Work in groups
activities and subjects.

160
I. Presentation (15')
Grammar: The present perfect - underline all the verbs in the present
- Ask Ss to recall what Tom tol Mai about perfect tense.
in the conversation in getting started - Play ‘board race’ game
- Ss underline all the verbs in the present
perfect tense.
- Use grammar box to explain that pp is
used to show that one has had or has never
had this experience.
- Provide the form of the pp.
S + have/ has + past participate
- Play ‘board race’ game: write two lists of
verbs on the board. Two teams will race to
the board to write the pp of these verbs.
Each team gets one pointfor the correct
participate. The teams finishes first gets 2
extra points

161
II. Practice (25’)
1. Put the verbs in the brackets into the pp Work individually
- Tell Ss that some information for this - Key:
exerciseis notmentioned directly in the
1. has been 2. has been
recording – it must be inferred.
_ Have ss do the task and ask them to 3. has visited 4. has been
support their answers with parts in the 5. hasn’t been
recording.
2. Put the verbs in the brackets in the Key:
correct form 1. Have you seen... I have seen
- Have Ss work on this exercise 2. go 3. have never been
individually before they compare answers 4. clean 5. takes 6. has eaten
with each other.
Key:
- Give feedback as a class discussion.
3. Look at Tom webpage. Tell a partner 1. He has read a book.
which he has done this week. 2. He has eaten “pho’.
- Elicit what there is in the photos by asking 3. Her has played football.
ss questions 4. He has got an A+.
- Ask ss to provide the verbs and their pp 5. He has washed his dog.
- Have Ss write the sentences in full in their
notebooks, then in pairs take turns talking
about what Tom has done this week.
III. Production (5’)
Class survey - move around and ask the questions in
- Make sure Ss can move around and ask the survey
different classmates for different questions.
- ss shouldn’t ask the same person all the
questions.
- When they have finished the survey, make
a class poll by asking ss to report the
results.
- Count the number os ‘yes’ answers to each
question and find out what is the thing the
most ss have ever done, and the thing that
the least of them/ or no one has done.
Home work.
- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in
the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.

162
Period 80 : Test 3
I. Mục đích yêu cầu:
Kiểm tra kiến thức hs đạt được trong quá trinh học, đặc biệt là các kiến thức có
trong các unit 7, 8, 9.
1. Đọc hiểu :
Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng sai, trả lời câu hỏi dựa vào nội dung bài học.
2. Viết:
Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
3. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :
Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.
II. Chuẩn bị :
Bài photo.
III. Ma trận :

Cấpđộ tư duy
Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Language Pho 4 4
1.0 1.0
focus Vocab 6 6
3.0 3.0
Gram 8 8
2.0 2.0
Reading 4 4
2.0 2.0
Writing 4 4
2.0 2.0
Tổng 6 16 4 26
3.0 5.0 2.0 10.

IV. Đề bài :
I. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:
Question 1: Odd one out. Which underlined sound is pnonounced differently in each
group? ( 1 point )
A. idea B. aerobics C. fair D.pair
A. this B. there C. than D. thank
A. worked B. needed C. wanted D. rented
A. cold B. long C. snow D. hold
163
Question 2: Choose and circle the best answerA, B, C or D ( 3points )
1. The food is very ………..
A. long B. delicious C. noisy D. historic
2. Where do you ……. fishing ?
A. play B. do C.go D. have
3. Who is the most popular British writer in the world ?
A. Dickens B. William Shakespeare C. Hemingway D. To Hoai
4. Hai can ……… boxing well.
A. do B. play C. go D. have
5. The …….. tells people what is happening in Viet Nam and the rest of the world.
A. national B. cartoon C. game show D. 7 o’clock news
6. Big Ben is the most famous tower in …..
A. Viet Nam B. England C. America D. Australia
II. PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:
Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs.( 2points )
1. He ( not go ) out last night, he ( stay ) at home.
2. Lan ( learn ) English for 2 years ?
- No, he ( learn ) for 3 years.
3. you ( wear ) uniform yesterday ?
No. I ( not wear ) yesterday.
4. your mother ( read ) book every night ?
- No, she ( watch ) TV.
Question 2: Read the following passage and answer the questions ( 2.0 points)
Australia is a island continent in the South Pacific. The capital is Canberra, but the
city with the biggest population is Sydney, which has nearly four million. English is the first
language of most people, but there are also immigrants who speak other languages.
1. Where is Australia?
................................................................................................................................
2. Is Canberra the capital of Australia?
.................................................................................................................................
3. What is the population of Sydney?
..................................................................................................................................
4. Do Australian people only speak English?
..................................................................................................................................
Question 3: Rearrange the words to complete the sentences. ( 6B-2.0 points; 6A-1point)
1, lives / street / grandparents / he / Hoang Quoc Viet / his / on / with.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
2, tallest / my / is / the / family / in / brother/ person / my.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
3, lives / very / from / he / far / office / his.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
4. did/ Who/ play/ with/ you/ badminton/ yesterday?
164
……………………………………………………………………………………....
Question 4 ( 6A ). Rewrite te following sentences ( 1.0 points)
1. No river in the world is as long as The Nile river
-> The Nile river …………………………………………….…………………………………………………
2. Nam is taller than Ba
-> Ba ………………………………………………………………………………………..…….………………
3.Nam is interested in watching televison
-> Nam likes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. There isn’t any sugar in the coffee.
-> The coffee…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:

A- PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM:
Question 1: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm
1A 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm
1B 2C 3B 4A 5D 6B

B- PHẦN TỰ LUẬN:
Question 1: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm
1. didn’t go – stayed
2. Has Lan learnt – has learnt
3. Did you wear – hasn’t worn
4. Does your mother read – watches
Question 2: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm
1. It’s in the South Pacific
2. Yes, it is
3. It has nearly four million
4. No, they don’t.
Question 3: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm-6B, 0,25đ – 6A
1. He lives with his grandparents on Hoang Quoc Viet Street.
2. My brother is the tallest person in my family.
3. He lives very far from his office.
4. Who did you play badminton with yesterday ?
Question 4: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm
1. The Nile river is the longest river in the world
2. Ba is shorter than Nam
3. Nam likes watching TV
4. The coffee hasn’t any sugar

165
 UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 4 : COMMUNICATION
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher’s activities Students' activities

Warmer (5'): Hang man - Guess each letter "LANDMARK"
- Cue: +What do you want to do first
when you go to a new school?
+ 8 letters
- Ask Ss to guess the letters one by one
and draw a line if they have each wrong
answer
166
-> Today we are going to learn how to
describe cities and landmarks
I. Pre- speaking (15') - design (v):
1. Teaching vocab
- symbol (n):
- Teacher use different techniques to teach
vocab (situation, reality) - landmark (n):
- Follow the five steps of teaching vocab. - creature (n):
- heritage (n):

- Repeat in chorus and individually

- Copy all the words
* Checking vocab: Magic wheel - Listen and answer
2. Activity - work individually
- Show the pitures of the five landmarks
Key:
and ask ss what they are.
- If they don’t know their English name, a. Merlion b. Big ben
give the English names and ask ss to c. Temple of literature
match them with the photos. d. Sydney opere House\
- Elicit from ss any information they e. Eiffel Tower
know about the landmarks:
Which countries and which cities are they
in ?
Key:
What type of building are they?
What were they built for?.... 1. Big Ben
II.While - speaking (20') 2. Sydney opere House
1. Exercise 2 3. Temple of literature
- Have ss read the five texts about the five 4. Eiffel Tower
landmarks. Set a time limit 5. Merlion
- Have them do the matching and ask
them to support their answers
2. Exercise 3
- Ask Ss to read the text again and allow
them a longer time limit
- Ask them to underline key words in each
text. KEY:
- Explain that key words are important
words that help us understand and 1. F
remember the main points of the text. 2. F
- Have ss do the T/F exercise individually, 3. T
then compare the answers with their 4. F
friends before discussing them as a class. 5. F
- Ask ss to support their answers 6. F
167
III. Post- speaking (5')
- Choose a country/ city/ landmark
yourself. - Work in groups of four
- Ask the class to guess what it is.
- Arrange groups of four to play the game.
- Each group then chooses the most
difficult city that they had to guess in their
group and presents it to the whole class as
a challenge.
. Home work.
- Summarize the main points of the lesson.

Week : 26 Preparing date: 17/2/2014

Period : 75 Teaching date:

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD

Lesson 5: SKILL 1
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
- Read for specific and general information in texts, including postcards.
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
Warm-Up (5’)
- Show The Class Some Real Postcards. - Answer The Questions
- Ask Ss Where The Postcards Were Sent
From.
- Ask Them To Guess Who Wrote The
Postcard And To Whom, Where Was It
Written, What Was It Written About...
I. Pre - Reading (10): Key:
1. Look At The Postcards 1. The Photo Is Of Stockholm,
168
- Discuss The Featutes Of The Postcards Sweden
With Ss: Photo On One Side, Short Text On 2. The Sender Writes About His/ Her
The Other Side, Can Be Sent Without Stay In The City.
Envelope,... 3. We Sent Postcards To Tell Our
- Draw Ss’attention To The Postcard. Ask Family And Friends That We Are
Them The Three Questions. Accept Having A Good Time, But We Still
Reasonable Answers. Miss Them And Want To Send Some
Photos Of The Place Where We Are
So That, Although They Cannot
Ii. While - Reading (20') Bewith Us There They Can Still See
1. Read The Postcard And Answer The How Beautiful It Is.
Questions. Key:
- Have Ss Look At The Questions First. 1. Mai Is In Stockholm.
- Ask Them To Underline The Key Words 2. She Is There With Her Family.
In The Questions. Tell Them These Key 3. The Weather Has Been Perfect. It Is
Words Will Help Them To Find The Sunny.
Information More Easily In The Text. 4. Mai is staying in a holtel.
- Have Them Read The Postcard And 5. She has invited the Royal Palace
Answer The Questions Individually Then and had ‘fika’ in a cafe in the Old
Compare The Answers With Each Other town.
Before Discussing Them As A Class. 6. Fika means a leisure break when
- Encourage Ss To Support Their Answers, one drinks tea/ coffee and perhaps has
Especially Numbers 6 And 8. some biscuits with friends and family
2. Match The Headings With The 7. She will cycle to discover the city.
Numbers. 8. Mai is feeling happy. She used the
- Have Ss Read The Text Again, This Time words such as “ fantastic, perfect,
To Match The Headings. amazing, too beautiful for words”
- Then Call Their Attention To How A Key:
Postcard Is Organized. 1. i 2. c 3. h 4.b
III. Post- Reading (10’) 5. d 6. g 7. f 8. e 9. a
- Ss can choose one of the cities they have
learnt about in this unit, or choose a city
that they like in Vietnam.
- Ask ss to imagine they have just arrived in
that cityand want to tell others about it. - Follow T’s instruction
- Ask them to work individually answering
the questions in the form of notes, but not in
full sentences.
- Using notes, have ss work in pairs and tell
each other about the city they choose. Make
sure they speak in full sentences now. Then
have them join another pair to make groups
169
of four and continue their discussions.
Homework:
- Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the
lesson and prepare skills 2.

Week : 27 Preparing date: 20/2/2014

Period : 76 Teaching date:

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD

Lesson 6: SKILL 2
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
- Listen for specific details including facts and figures
- Write a holiday postcard
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
Warmer (5'): Whisper To A Yell Words:
- Divide The Class Into 2 Groups 1. Royal Palace
- Whisper The Words One By One To Two 2. Nobel Prize
Ss From Two Groups 3. museum
- The Two Ss Whisper To The Others, The 4. cafes
Last One Will Yell The Word 5. restaurants
- Which Team Yells The Word First And 6. islands
Correctly Will Have One Point.
- The Team Has More Point Will Be The
Winner
I. Listening (15’)
1. Pre- Listening: Look At The Pictures.
What Do You See?
- Ask Ss What They See In The Photos First.
- Ask Ss If They Know About Nobel Prize.
170
- Tell Ss They Will Listen About The Old
Town In Stockholm, And How Nobel Prizes
Are Awarded Every Year In Stockholm.
2. While – Listening
2.1: Listen And Write T Or F
- Before Listening To The Recording, Go Key:
Through The Statements With Ss. Explain 1. T
Any New Words. 2. F
- Ask Ss To Underline The Most Important 3. F
Information In Each Sentence. 4. F
- Tell Ss They Need To Listen For The Main 5. F
Ideas They Hear. Play The Recording As
Many Time As Ss Wish.
2.2: Listen Again To The Talk And Fill In
The Gaps Key:
- Expalin To Ss That This Time They Need 1. 14
To Listen For The Exact Details In The 2. 700
Recording. 3. 3,000
- Ask Them To Identify The Kind Of 4. 10 December
Information They Have To Find Out: Years, 5. 10 million
Amount Of Money, Number Of People,
Date, Etc.
- Play The Recording For Ss To Fill In The
Gaps.
3. Post- Listening
- Ask Ss To Work In Groups Of Four To
Summarize The Recording They Heard. - work in groups of four to
- Call Some Ss To Talk In Front Of The summarize the recording
Class.
II. Writing: A holiday postcard (20’)
1. Pre- Writing
- Write 5 Ws And 1 H On The Board And
Ask Ss To Give Examples.
- Draw Their Attention To The Postcard In 2
Page 28. Ask Ss How The 5 Ws And 1 H Are
Answered In The Postcard.
- Have them make the questions in full and
find the information from the postcard that
gives the answers
2. While – writing
2.1 Rearrange the words to make
sentences
171
- Explain to ss that the space for writing on
postcards is not big so people often write Key:
short sentences which contain the most 1. Stockholm ids fantastic
important information, and which can 2. We’re in Da Lat!
express what they are feeling. 3. We’re having a good time here!
- Have ss rearrange the exclamations 4. I love Disneyland!
2.2 Write a postcard 5. You must come!
- Ask ss to use the notes they have made in 6. I wish you were here!
speaking 4 page 28 to write a postcard to
their family orfriends.
- Remind them how the 5ws and 1h are
included in the notes - Write a postcard
3. Post- writing
- Pair ss and ask them to write postcards to
each other.
- Have them swap and give feedback on each
other’s writing once they have finished.
HOMEWORK (5’)
- Summarize the main point of the lesson. - Write and discuss with their friends
- Assign home work.

Week : 27 Preparing date: 22/2/2014

Period : 77 Teaching date:

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD

Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Cities of the world”
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / Əu / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities
A. Warm-up: (5’) Lucky number
(Use ex1 to warm up) Key;
172
- Divide the class into 2 groups 1. a,b
- Each group in turn chooses one number 2. a,c
and answers the question 3. a,c
- With each right answer, they will have one 4. a,b
point. If they choose ‘lucky number’ they 5. b,c
will have one point without answering the
question.
- Which group has more points will win the
game
B. NEW LESSON. (35’)
* Set the sence: You have revised
vocabulary related to the topic “ cities of the
words” , now we will revise the present
perfect
Exercise 2: Put the verbs in the prackets
into the present perfect. Key:
- Ask ss to complete the conversation 1. have you ever eaten
individually, then share answers with a 2. have you eaten
parner. 3. have been
Exercise 3: In pairs, complete this fact 4. have been
sheet about Vietnam 5. have you visited
- Go through questions with ss. if they don’t 6. have seen
have any information about a particular
question, stop and give at least 3 answer Key: (suggested)
option for them to consider. Oldest university: Quoc Tu Giam,
- After they have completed the fact sheet , Thang Long- Hanoi (1076)
have a whole class discussion about the Most popular Vietnamese writer:
answers, as there could be several correct Nguyen Du, Nam Cao
answers. Most popular food: spring rolls,
noodles
Most popular drink: tea, coffee
Most common activity: watching tv,
Exercise 4: Write a short paragrap football
- tell ss for a reference they can look at the
text about Britain on page 25 in Ss’ book
COMMUNICATION - Write a short paragrap about
- Try the first ‘ Have you ever..?’ question on Vietnam
page 26 in s’s book with 2 ss as an example.
- Ask the class who they think told the truth,
who didn’t, and why they think so.
- Have ss play the game in pair - Play the game in pairs and report
- Ask some pairs to report what they have
173
found out about their partner.
Finished!
- Ask ss to use their results for the questions
in looking back to guide them as they
complete this self- assessment.
- Identify any difficulties and weak areas and
provide further practice.
HOMEWORK. (5’)
- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Ask Ss to Prepare Getting started – U10

Week : 27 Preparing date: 22/2/2014

Period : 78 + 79 Teaching date:

REVIEW 3 (UNIT 7-8-9)

I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:at the end of this lesson Ss can review all the knowledge what they have
learnt in units 7-9
2. Skill : reading, writing, listening and speaking.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher’s activities Students' activities

174
A. Warm-up: (5’) Lucky number
(Use ex1 to warm up) Key:
- Divide the class into 2 groups 1. C
- Each group in turn chooses one number and 2. A
answers the question 3. A
- With each right answer, they will have one point. 4. B
If they choose ‘lucky number’ they will have one 5. D
point without answering the question. 6. D
- Which group has more points will win the game
B. New lesson
I. Language
1. Pnonunciation
Ex2: Practise saying the sentences. Pay
attention to the pronunciation of the underlined
words.
- Play the recording and ask Ss to listen carefully.
- Play the recording again and ask them to repeat
the sentences.
- T checks on their pronunciation of the key
sounds.
2. Vocabulary
Ex3: Choose A, B or C to fill the gaps in the
passage.
- Ss do separately and share their answers later
with a partner. Key: 1.A 2. B 3.A 4.A 5.C
- Check Ss’ answer.
Ex4: Choose one of the words/ phrases in the
box to complete sentences 1-6.
- Ask ss to look at the whole sentence to decide
what kind of word is missing before referring to
the list of words given. Key:
1. Paris 2. Football
3. GRAMMAR 3. Local Television
Ex5: Complete the sentences with the present 4. Country 5. Remote
simple, pp or past simple form of the verbs in Control
brackets. 6. Summer Sports
- This is a chance for ss to look back at the use of
the verb tenses. Focus on the difference between Key:
the p.s and p.p 1. started 2. play
Ex 6: Are the underlined question words 3. had 4. is
correct? If not, correct them. 5. bought 6. has
- Ss must by now be familiar with, and quite worked
175
skillful in, using question words. If the question
word is wrong, ask ss to explain why. Key:
Ex7: Use the superlatives in the box to 1. What 2. When
complete the sentences. 3. Cotrrect 4. How tall
- This look back at the use of superlatives with 5. Correct
long adjectives. Check Ss’ answers.
4. Everyday English
Ex8: Choose the best replies for the questions. Key:
- This create a situation in which one can use the 1. the most expensive
language already learnt, in daily conversation. 2. the most popular
II. SKILLS 3. the most interesting
Reading 4. the most colourful
Ex1+2: 5. the most dangerous
- Ss do this exercise individually, and then check it Key:
with their peers. 1.e 2.a 3.c 4.b 5.d
- Let ss discuss among themselves before
finalizing the answers.
Speaking
Ex3: Work in groups. Interview your friends Key:
about their likes. Takes notes in the table and Ex1: 1.B 2. A
report it to your class? Ex2:
- This, again, revises the language items learnt but 1. Who’s faster
in a more dynamic form: interviewing and 2. putting your toes
reporting the results together
Listening 3. Who’s faster
Ex4: Listen to the interview with Nick and fill 4. Putting your toes
in the blanks. together
- This listening aims at revision of present oerfect
tense. Play the recording and let ss write down the
answers.
Ex5: Listen to an interview with Phong and
complete the answers with information from
the listening.
- This listening requires ss to listen more
attentively for specific information. Key:
- Ask ss to read the questions first and determine 1. competition
what information is needed for the answer 2. skiing
- Then, T plays the recording. 3. country
Writing 4. canada
6. Mark and Tim visited India last summer. 5. cartoon
Look at the information in the table to write a
complete passage about their visit Key:
176
- Ask ss to read the table and decide what tense/ 1. running race
sentence structure to use for the writing and how 2. Thailand
the information is organized. Only then should T 3. Wait and see
let ss write.
- Ss might want to change some details from the
table. Encourage them to do so.
They can start with:
Last summer, Tim and mark visited india. They.....

UNIT 7: Television
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to televosion.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
IV.New lesson.

Sts’ and T’s activities Contents

1. Warm up
- T writes the word “ Television” on board - I can watch many cartoons on it.
and asks Ss to give any ideas/ vocabulary - It helps to cheer me up…
they know relating to the topics. 1. Vocabulary.
- favourite programme:
2. Presentation - channel:
- Pre teach some new words. - funny:
177
- Set the scence: What are you expecting to - schedule:
hear. Ask ss: What will they talk about? 2. Getting started.
- Getting started. What’s on today?
a. Read the conversation again and answer
the questions.
Key:
3. Practice 1. Laughing out Loud.
a- Ss work individually. Allow them to 2. VTV3.
share their answers with their partners 3. No, they aren’t.
before discussing as a class. 4. Because he is awful.
b- This task focuses on the use of adjectives 5. Tom is stupid, but funny
to describe the programme. Let Ss look for b. Find the adjectives describing each
the adjectives from the conversation. character in the conversation and write
c- Supplement the list of adjectives with them here.
words drawn from Ss experiences. Key: Mr. Bean : funny, awful
Tom: stupid, funny
Jerry: intelligent.
c. Which adjective(s) below can you use to
describe a TV programme you have
watched? What programme is it?
Possible answers:
Yes: popular, historical, serious, long,
educational, boring, funny, good,
4. Further practice entertaining, live.
Ex2: Ask Ss to do the matching No: beautiful, small
- Go round and check if they match the 3. Practice
pictures and the words correctly. -Ex2: Put the correct word in the box under
- Show Ss how to pronounce each word by each picture.
saying it and ask Ss to repeat. Key:
1. national television
2. news programme
3. local television
Ex3: Ss have to read the sentences carefully 4. comedy
and decide which word is the right one. T 5. game show
can guide them to some clues like “ It 6. animal programme
makes me laugh” “ Disney… Ex3: Use suitable words to complete the
sentences.
Key: 1. national
2. comedy
3. channels
4. competition
5. Cartoons.
178
 6. educational
Ex4: eg: There are not enough programmes Ex4:Write down two things you like about
for children or I can watch many films… television and two things you don’t like
about it.
5. Homework. eg: There are not enough programmes for
- Learn new words by heart children or I can watch many films…
- Do exercise 1,2 in work book
- Prepare: A closer look 1

* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………

Date of planning: 1/1/2014

Date of teaching: 7/ 1/ 2014

Period 58 UNIT 7: Television

Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to pronounce the sound /θ/, /ð/ correctly in
isolation and in context . Use the lexical items related to television.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.

Sts’ and T’s activities Contents

1. Warm up
179
Chatting: Which is your favourite TV
programme?
Which MC do you like best?
1. Vocabulary
2. Presentation Ex1: Write the words/ phrases in the box
- Teach vocabulary under the pictures.
Ex1. Ask Ss to work in group of three. Key:
When Ss completed their work, T play the 1. newsreader
recording to check their answers as well as 2. TV schedule
to practise the pronunciation of the new 3. MC
words. 4. viewer
5. remote control
6. weatherman

Ex2: Choose a word from the box for each

description below.
3. Practice Key:
Ex2: Revise the vocabulary learnt in both 1. Weatherman
Getting started and Activity 1. Ss learn to 2. newreader
identify a word from its description. 3. remote control
Ex3: Ss can refer to 2 and the suggestd 4. MC
structures in 3 to see how a word is defined. 5. volume button
T writes some prompts on the board so that 6. TV viewer.
Ss can imitate.
Eg: In this programme, people… EX3: Game
A person who…. 1. Newreader: A person who reads
news.
2. weatherman: a man who gives a
weather forecast.
3. comedian: a person whose job is to
make people laugh by telling jokes
and funny stories.

4. Further practice. 2. Pronunciation

Ask Ss to practise the sounds /θ/, /ð/ Ex4: Listen and repeat words.
Ex4: Ask Ss to listen carefully to the words
T talks about the differences between two Ex5: Which words in Ex4 have /θ/and
sounds. which have /ð/. Listen again and write them in
Ex5: Ask Ss to write the words in the two the correct column.
appropriate boxes. Check if they do it /θ/ /ð/
correctly. theater there
Ex6: Tongue Twisters Thanksgiving them
180
Allow Ss to practise reading the tongue earth neither
twisters among themseves. anything weatherman
5. Homework. both than
- Learn vacabulary by heart through feather
- Do exercise in work book Ex6: Tongue Twisters
- Prepare: A closer look 2 The thirty- three thieves are thinking of
how to get through the security

* Adjustment:
………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………

Date of planning: 14/1/2014

Date of teaching: 21/1/2014
Period 64
UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 1: Getting started
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to the lexical items related to the topic "sports
and games" and use the combinations: go, play, do + N/Ving.
- Vocabulary: lexical items related to sports and games.
- Go, play, do + N/Ving
II. Preparation:
- Pictures, worksheets, a CD & a cassette player.
181
III. Procedures:
A. Organization
- Checking attendance
B. New lesson

Students and teacher’s activities Content

1. Warm up
* Chatting:
? What do you do in your free time?
? Do you play sports?
? What sports do you do?
? How often do you do it?
T leads Ss to the lesson.
2. Presentation I. Vocabulary.
- Teacher use different techniques Do boxing: tập quyền anh
to teach vocab (situation, realia, Do aerobics: tập e- rô- bic
examples…..) Do karate: tập ka- ra- te
- Follow the seven steps of teaching
Play chess: chơi cờ vua
vacab.
Play table tennis: chơi bóng bàn
Play volleyball: chơi bóng chuyền
Go skiing: đi trượt tuyết
* Checking vocab: Rub-out and Go cycling: đi đạp xe
remember. Outdoor (adj): ngoài trời
- Copy all the words Outdoors (adv), (n): khu vực bên ngoài
T: lets ss listen and repeat the words Breaktime (n): nghỉ giải lao
in activity 2

3. Practice II. Practice

T: lets ss name the sports and Activity 3:
games in Activity 3 individually 1. cycling
first, then compare their answer
2. table tennis
with a parter
3. running
4. swimming
5. chess
6. skiing
T: explains the difference between “
a sport” and “a game”.
A sport: an activity that you do for
pleasure and that need physical
182
exercise.
A game: an activty or sport with
rules in which people or team
compete against each other.
T: shows the picture in activity 1.
? Who do you see in the picture?
? Where are they?
? What do you think they are
talking about?
T: lets ss listen one time to answer
the followning questions:
? What sports can Duong do?
? Is Mai good at sports?
Ss: Duong can do karate and play
table tennis.
No, she isn’t.
T: asks ss roleplay the dialogue
then calls 2 pairs to perform it.
T: lets ss play the game Lucky
Number to answer the questions 1.a
Activity 1
a. 1. Duong can play table tennis and do karate.
2. Mai is going to learn karate.
3. Because the equipment there is modern and
the people are friendly.
T: allows ss to discuss in groups to
find the meanings of the expression 4. Duong played with Duy and won(for the first
in 1.b in the conversation. time)
5. At the Karate club.
b. 1. Wow: used to express surprise.
2. Congratulations: used to congratulate sb/ to
T: lets ss practice the sample tell that you are please about their success.
dialogue in 1.c then asks them to 3. Great: use to show admiration
make a similar conversation. 4. See you: used when you say goodbye.
4. Production. Activity 4
T: asks ss to do the activity 4 in Play: chess, table tennis, volley
pairs in 3 minutes Do:boxing, aerobics, karate
Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running, skiing
T: lets ss do activity 5 individually Activity 5:
in 3 minutes 1. do
2. is watching

183
T: asks ss to conduct a survey (ask 3. goes
2 friends to complete the survey 4. likes
then report the survey and give 5. played
comment on how sporty your friend Questions Answers ss’s ss’s
is.) answe answe
r r
1. Can you A. Yes
swim? B. No
2. Do you play A. Yes
outdoors B. No
everyday?
3. Do you get A. Yes
up early and B. No
do morning
exercise?
4. What do A. Play in
you do at the school
breaktime at yard.
school? B. Sit in the
classroom.
5. What do A. very
you think of good/ useful
sports/ games? A. A waste
of time.
5. Homework
Learn by heart all the new words.
Do Ex in workbook
Prepare for: A Closer Look 1
* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
***************************************************************************
********

Date of planning: 12/1/2013

Date of teaching: 22/1/2013

Period: 65
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1

184
I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to pronounce correct the sounds /eə/ and /ɪə/
correctly in isolation and in context; and enrich their vocabulary related to sports items.
- Develop listening skill, reading skill and pronunciation.
- Vocabulary: sports items
- Pronunciation: /eə/ and /ɪə/
II. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, a CD & a cassette player
III. Procedures:

Sts’ and T’s activities Content

1. Warm- up
* Bingo:
T: asks ss to write 6 words about sports or
games.
T: reads: tennis, table tennis, soccer, football,
volleyball, running, fishing, cycling, skiing,
karate, swimming, chess, aerobics, skipping
ropes, badminton…
T: leads in the lesson I. Vocabulary.
2. Presentation Sports (n) Giày thể thao
. Teaching vocab shoes
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach Boat (n) Thuyền
vocab (situation, realia) Skateboard (n) Ván trượt
Goggles (n) Kính bơi, kính
bảo hộ
* Checking vocab: write the words under the Racket (n) Vợt cầu lông
picture Activity 2 Skis (n) Ván trượt tuyết
Racquet (n) Vợt bóng bàn,
tennis
II. Practice
Activity 2
1. A bicycle 2. A ball
3. Sports shoes 4. Skis
5. A boat 6. A racket
7. A skateboard 8. Goggles
3. Practice Activity 3
T: tells ss to do the task independently first. 1. c 4. e 7. b
Calls some ss to write their answers on the
185
board, then check their answers as a class. 2. d 5. g 8. f
3. a 6. h
T: explains how to form the sounds /eə/ and /ɪə/
together. Asks ss to observe teacher for the
correct pronunciation of the two sounds.
T: plays the CD 3 times and lets ss listen and
reapeat. Calls some ss to read aloud.
T: allows ss to do act 5 individually in 4 mins. Activity 5
Calls 2 ss to write their answers on the board. 1. A 2. C
T: checks their answers as a class through the 3. B 4. A
game: Tasks the ss to touch their ear if they hear
5. B
/ɪə/ sound, touch their hair if they hear /eə/
sound, stay still if they don’t hear these two 6. A
sounds while teacher is saying the word aloud.
4. Production
*Game: Ping Pong
T: devides the class into 2 teams. Team 1 thinks
of the words with /eə/ sound. Team 2 thinks of
the words with /ɪə/ sound. One member of team
1 says aloud a word with /eə/ sound.
Immediately another member in team 2 says
aloud a word with /ɪə/ sound.
5. Homework
Learn by heart all the new words.
Do Ex A1,2 P10, B1,2 ,3 P10,11 (SBT)
Prepare for next ; Closer Look 2

* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………….

*************************************************

Date of planning: 3 /2 /2014

Date of teaching: 10/ 2 /2014

Period 66
UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES
186
 Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use the past simple; and imperatives to tell sb to do sth
- Grammar: - Past simple tense
- Imperative
II. Preparation:
- Visual aids: pictures.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
III. Procedures:
Sts and T’s activities Content
1. Warm- up
* Question and answer:
? What did you do last Sunday?
T: leads in the past simple tense.
2. Presentation I. Grammar:
Teaching grammar. 1. The past simple tense
T: writes the teacher’s question in warm- a. Examples
up stage ans some Ss’answers on the
A: What did you do last Sunday?
board.
B: I stayed at home. I did my homework..
T: asks to look at the examples to draw b. Usage:
the rules, the usage, and the form. We use the past simple tense to talk about
a finished action in the past. We often say
when it happened.
c. Form (Textbook)
Iregular verbs:
Be- was/ were Have- had
Win- won Eat- ate
Go- went Do- did
d. Notes
Adverbs of time are used with the past
simple are: yesterday, 2 weeks/ 3
months… ago, last week/ month/ year/
Sunday…., in 2012/ 2011…
T: reminds ss of some imperative 2. Imperatives
sentences normally used in the class. We use imperative to tell someone to do
T: lets look at the examples to draw the something or to give a direct order.
usage the form. Eg: Sit down (please).

187
 Open your books.
Don’t be late for school.
3. Practice II. Practice
T: lets ss work in pairs to give the Activity 1:
answers for Activity 1. Teacher observes, 1. were 2. was
helps when necessary and correct ss’ 3. was/ did/ was 4. Did/ were/ did/ was
mistakes. Activity 2:
T: lets ss do Activity 2 individually. 1. was 6. had
Teacher calls on 2 students to write their 2. didn’t do 7. did
answer on the board. Teacher corrects 3. sat 8. visited
their answers and gives explanation if 4. watched 9. ate
necessary. 5. went 10. scored
Activity 4:
T: calls 2 pairs to read the dialogue with 1. Take your umbrella
the correct verb forms. 2. Please don’t litter. 3. Please hurry
T: lets ss do Activity 4 individually then up.
allows them to compare their answers 4. Don’t train too hard. 5. Put on your
with their friends. coat.
Activity 5:
T: asks ss to work in groups of 4, take Suggested answers:
turns telling their friends what to do or Pay your fee first.
not to do at the gym. (Activity 5) Put on your trainers/ sports shoes.
Listen to the instructor carefully.
Don’t litter.
Don’t eat or drink at the gym.
4. Production
T: lets ss work in pairs asking and
answering about their last weekend. Calls
some ss to report their answers.
5. Homework
Do B4 P11, E1 P15 (SBT)
Prepare: Communication
* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

*****************************************

Date of planning: 4 / 2 /2014

Date of teaching: 11 / 2 /2014
188
Period 67
UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Enrich their background knowledge about sports through a sports quiz, students can
also talk about their sports activities and talk about their favorite sportsman/ sportswoman.
- Speaking skill.
II. Preparation:
- Visual aids: pictures.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
III. Procedures:

Sts and T’s activities Content

1. Warm up
T: shows the picture of 5 interlocked
rings
? What are they?
Ss: They are 5 interlocked rings
? What do the 5 rings represent?
They represent the five major regions
of the world (Africa, the America, Asia,
Europe, and Oceania)
? What are the colors?
Ss: Blue, yellow, black, green, and red.
T: explains: every national flag in the
world has at least one of the five
colors. I. Vocabulary.
T: leads in the lesson.
2. Presentation
* Preteach the vocab Fit (adj): Khỏe mạnh
Ring (n): Vòng tròn
Marathon (n) Chạy ma ra tông
Achieve (v) Đạt được
Achievement (n) Thành tựu
* Checking teaching technique: Rub- hold (v) Tổ chức
out and remember
3. Practice. II. Practice
189
T: devides the class into two teams. Activity 1
Each team takes turns to pick a small 1. There are usually 22 players.(11 on each
piece of paper side)
Written down the questions in activity 2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (devided into
1 to aswer. One score is given to one two halves)
correct answer
3. They are held every four years.
4. No, there weren’t Olympic Games in
2011. (They were held in 2004, 2008,
2012…..)
5. A marathon is.
4. Production

5. Homework
Learn by heart all the new words and
structures
Do exercises : C1,2 P12 (SBT)
Prepare for next.

* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

*****************************************

Date of planning: 8 / 2 / 2014

Date of teaching: 15 / 2 / 2014
190
Period 68 UNIT 8 : Sport and games
Lesson 5: Skill 1

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for specific information about famous
sportspeople. Talk about the activities/ sports/ games they do in their apare time.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure

Sts’ and T’s activities Contents

1. Warm up
- Can you give me names of some famous - Huynh Duc, Hong Son….
football players in Viet Nam?
- Of whom you are his fan? - Hong Son is my fan
2. Activity
Reading Reading
a, Pre- reading 1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions.
- Work in pairs to discuss the questions. 1. Do you know Pele. The King of
- Encourage Ss to give their ideas. Football? What is special about him?
b, While reading 2. Where does he come from?
- Tell Ss to read the passage quickly and 3. What other things do you know about
check their ideas. Allow them to read in 5 him?
minutes. 2. Read the text quicky to check your ideas
- Ask Ss to read the passage again, then in 1.
answer the questions. 3. Read again and answer the questions.
- T read aloud while they track the text with Key:
their fingers. 1. Pele was born on 21st October 1940.
c, Post reading 2. People called him “ The King of
- Let Ss talk about Pele Football” because he is such a good
- Refer to other famous football players football player.
they know and ask them who they think the 3. He became Football Player of the
best football player they know and ask them Century in 1999.
who they think the best football player is. 4. He scored 1, 281 goals in total.
Speaking 5. Yes, he is.
a, Pre – speaking Speaking
Exercise 4: 4. How often do you go/do/play these
- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick sports/games? Tick the right column.
the right column.
- T refer to people in Viet Nam in general,
asking them why they usually or never play
191
or do this or that.

b, While – speaking
Exercise 5: 5. Work in groups. What kind of sports/
Let Ss work in groups asking and games do you do most often? Why?
answering questions. ( They should refer to
the table in 4) 6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the
Exercise 6: Divide the class into groups of 4 following questions.
or 5. Let them discuss their answers to the 1. Do you like football?
questions. When finish, T asks one S from 2. Do you play football or only watch it?
each group “ What is the most interesting 3. What other sports do you play?
thing you learnt from your discussion? - Do you play them well?
c, Post – speaking - When and how often do you play them?
In pairs, one S is an interviewer and other is 4. Do you belong to any clubs?
a famous sportsperson. Ss role-play an 5. If you don’t play sport(s), what do you
interview. T and Ss can brainstorm possible often do in your spare time?
interview questions before the activity.
3. Homework.
- Learn adjectives
- Do exercise in work book
- Prepare: Skill 2

* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

*****************************************

Date of planning: 10 / 2 / 2014

Date of teaching: 17 / 2 / 2014
192
Period 69 UNIT 8: Sport and games
Lesson 6: Skill 2

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get information about the sports/
games people play.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new
lesson. -Ask Ss to recall the two places in the
- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1
brochure in skills 1
HL Bay and Hue

2. Presentation. 1Nick’family are in the travel agent’s

.They want to go on holiday.They are
choosing a place from the brochure
above .which place do they choose?
3. Practice.
- Listen
- Ask Ss which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday - They go to HL BAy
destination
- Play the recording for the answer.
2. Listen again and answer the following
- Wok in pairs to ask and answer. questions.
1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha
Trang
2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui
Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL
Bay?
3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is
more interesting.
4- Yes, he is
193
3. Write a travel guide about a place WRITING
you know 3. Write a travel guide about a place you
- Ask some questions to prepare the class know
for the activity - Do you have picture or can you draw a
map of the place?
- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other natural
wonders?
- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?

4. Production.
4. In notes , fill each blank in the
- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen network with the inforation about the
places place.Then use these notes to write a
-Check their ideas at the end short paragraph about it.

1 – where is it?
2- How far is it?
3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?
5. Home work. 5- What is special about it?
- Copy and learn the new words. 6- what can you do there?
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================

Ngày soạn : 13/ 2/ 2014

194
 Ngày dạy: 18/ 2/ 2014
Period 70: Unit 8 : Sports and games
Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. TEACHING POINTS:

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: superative form of short adjectives.

- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.

- Write a description of their favourite sport or games.

* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.

II. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your favourite Group of four
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. foootball 2.badminton 3.
them repeat the words. Check their swimming .
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for
them to choose the correct adjectives. B. Grammar
 Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually fast happy exciting
first. then they can check their answers with hot noisy expensive
a partner before discussing the answers as a large quiet convenient
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of heavy difficult
their original answers so they can polluted
use that information in their Now you  Activity 4 KEY
can......statements. adj comparative form
fast faster
195
-T elicits the language being practiced in this convenient more convenient
activity noisy noisier
difficult more difficult
heavy heavier
expensive more expensive
happy happier
hot hotter
polluted more polluted
exciting more exciting
 Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
-Ss read the questions and answer once or :*Activity 6.
twice( they read them aloud). Then match KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
them. If there is time, have them write their :*Activity 7.
notebooks. Finished! Now you can..
. name places
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions . give directions
and answers . .use adjective to
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self describe places.
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .compare things
areas and provide further practice.
-T ask ss look at the picture of two D. Project
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the What is your ideal neighbourhood?
tipical features of them. 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood.
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their 2. write a description of it.
imagination.( if have time) - where it is / what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK.
-Assign home work. -Learn the new words.
- Talk about sports and games.
-Make a description.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

196
 Ngày soạn : 17/ 2/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 22/ 2/ 2014
Period 71: Unit 9: Sports and games
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of the Sports and games
+/ Making and
+ Making and responding to a suggestion.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-Before Ss open their books, review the
previous Unit focus on the key language Ask Ss questions about the picture
and structures learnt. eg: How many people are there?
- Write the unit title on the board What are they doing?
“geography club ” explain the meaning of
surprise and asks Ss to guess what the
picture might be about . Let Ss open their
books and check their answers.
2. Presentation.
- T can also Ss to share any recent 1. Listen and read.
experiences of going on a picnic. */ New words.
Play the recording - tennis
ss listen and read. - soccer
3. Practice. - go skiing
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation - cycling
to find the phrases
- Practice saying them together a Answer the following questions
- Pay attention to intonation when asking 1- Vy is
questions 2- She went to the wrong room
- Ask pairs to role-play the short 3- Uluru
conversations before demonstrating for 4- Australia
the class 5- An island
- Demonstrate the game to the class first. b.Classroomlanguage
197
 1- Can you spell that ,please?
2- Can you repeat that .please
3- Can I come in.?
c.Brainstorm situations whenpeople
use these sentences.Then role-play the
situations with a partner.
2. Listen and repeat the following
- Ask Ss label the pictures. words
1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
- T asks Ss to read the conversation in 1 4- forest 5- cave 6- desert
again . tick the words you can find. 7- lake 8- beach 9- island
10- valley
4. Production.
-Guide the way to do . 3. Now label the pictures.
- Ss can present their flowers to class or 1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
make a display of the flowers on a 4- forest 5 cave 6- desert
noticeboard. 7- lake 8- beach
5. Home work. 9- island 10- valley
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson. 4. Read the conversation in 1 again .
tick the words you can find.

* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

*****************************************

198
 Date of planning: 11 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 18 / 2 / 2014

Period 69 UNIT 8: Sport and games

Lesson 7: Looking back and Project.

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocabulary, grammar, communication
and understanding about some traditional games in project.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board.
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.
Sts’ and T’s activities Contents
1. Warm up
Ask Ss to look at the pictures
- What is the name of the sport in each * Vocabulary
picture? 1. Find one odd word or prase in each line.
- Which is your favorite sport? Key: 1. C 2.A 3. D 4. C 5. B
2. Activity 2. Read the four words in each line. Write
a- Activity 1: Vocabulary the name of the game or sport the four
Ex 1- Ss do this task individually. T corrects words belong to
their mistakes and lets them read the words Key:
correcly. 1- cycling
Ex 2- Let Ss repeat the words. Check their 2- football
pronunciation. Tell Ss to write the answers 3- boxing
in their notebooks. Then T corrects the 4- table tennis
mistakes. 5. basketball
b- Activity 2: Grammar * Grammar
Ex3: Have Ss write their answers in their 3. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct
notebooks. T checks their answers. form.
Ex4: Ss work in pairs or groups to finish or Key: 1. are 2. took 3. started 4. are playing
199
write the sentences. T gives correction. 4. did you do- cycled – watched
Ex5: Ss do the task individually first. Then 4. What do you say in these situations?
they can check their answers with a partner Key:
before discussing the answers as a class. T 1. Please stop making noise
gives corrections. Have some Ss read the 2. Go out to play with your friends.
whole passage aloud. The rest of the class 3. Don’t feed the animals
should track the text with their fingers as 4. Stand in a line, boys!
the other Ss read. 5. Don’t tease the dog.
5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish
the passage.
Key:
1. play 2. hear 3. games 4. sports 5. famous
* Communication
6. Match the questions in A with their
c- Activity 3: Communication correct answers in B.
Ex6: Ss read the questions and answers Key: 1. a 2. e 3. b 4. c 5. d
once or twice. Then match them. Finished! Now you can   
- Ss work in pairs and role- play the 
questions and answers. * talk about sports and
- Ss write all sentences in their games
notebooks if have enough time. * talk about things that
* Finished! happened in the past
Ask ss to complete the self-assessment. * tell someone to do
Identify any difficulties/ weak areas and s.thing or give an order.
provide further practice as needed. * Project
1- Read the passage about the game “
3. Project Blind man bluff”
Ex1: - Have Ss read the passage carefully. What you need: A blindfold, an open space
Explain new words and anything difficult and 5 players or more.
for Ss. Make sure they understand 1. Stand in a circle, pick one….
everything throughly. 2. He/ She has to try and touch the
Ex2: Let Ss work in groups. Each group others. the other players should try….
chooses a game or sport. Let them talk, then 3. When the seeker catches…
write a bout it. 4. When the seeker guesses the other’s
name…
2- Choose one of the following sports/
games ( or one of your own) and write
about it.
4. Homework - Tug of war ( rope pulling)
- Review vocabulary, grammar… - Skipping
- Do exercises in workbook. - Marbles
- Prepare: Unit 9 – Getting started
200
* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

*****************************************

Ngày soạn : 16/ 2/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 22/ 2/ 2014
Period 71: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I. Teaching points:
- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand about cities of the world, review vocabs about
continients, countries, cities and landmark.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students Board & contents

Warm up A. WARM UP. (Network)
(Network) ruler
-Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get Ss to write down vocabs about TV
programmes. Famous places
-Give feed back and decide which is the
winner of the game.
-Provide some more vocabs about TV
programmes.
B. NEW LESSON
-Present new words. * Vocabulary
continients
- Check: Rub out and Remember. Asia
Europe
South America
North America

201
1. Listen and Read 1.Listen & Read
? Look at the picture.
What are they doing?
What are they watching?
- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to
answer the questions. 2. *Answers: 1F, 2F,3T
-Get them to read aloud the answers.
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check. b. *Answers:
-Give feed back. 1.Asia
- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to 2. Europe
find the adjectives. .........
2. Putting.
- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions. Example.
- Call some pairs to speak aloud. 1. national television
- Correct some. 2. new programme

-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the 3. Completing.
poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask Answer key:
qs to check Ss’ understanding of the poem. 1. national
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their 2. comedy
partner then read the poem aloud.
- Listen &correct

- Ask Ss to match the words with the TV

programmes
- Let ss listen and read.
- Explain some words if necessary.

C. CONSOLIDATION
- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the
things and say out the words, make up sentences
with the words if there is time.
-Ss draw pictures next to new words in their
vocabulary book.

Homework - Learn by heart new vocabulary

-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. - Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Asign home work. -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
202
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 17/ 2/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 24/ 2/ 2014
Period 72: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of travel items
+/ Pronunciation /t/ and /st/
+/ New words: - plaster, walking boots, painkillers, sun cream, scissors, sleeping bag,
backpack
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new - Bring some travel items

lesson. ex: raincoat, umbrella backpack.....
-vocabulary
Travel items 1. Match theitems with the pictures then
- Discuss some of the placesin the practise saying the following items .
previous : */ New words.
desert, mountain..... - plaster | ˈplɑːstə |
- Do I need a backpack in the desert? - painkillers | ˈpeɪnkɪlə |
- Why do you think so? - sun cream | sʌn kriːm |
- scissors | ˈsɪzəz |
203
2. Presentation. - sleeping bag | ˈsliːpɪŋ bæɡ |
- backpack | ˈbækpæk |
Ss listen and read.
1. Match theitems with the pictures then
3. Practice. practise saying the following items .
- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with 1- painkillers
Ss. 2- scissors
3- plaster
- Read and act out the sentences for Ss. 4- sun cream
- Clicit ideas for sentense1. 5- sleeping bag
- Then allow ss to complete the remaining 6- walking boots
sentences. 7- backpack
-Check their ideas at the end. 8- compass

- Remind ss that in the introduce they 2.Complete the following sentenses

thought about useful things for a 1- compass
beach,desert , mountain... 2- sun cream
-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday 3- painkills
and they need to order the otems from 4- backpack
very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8) 5- plaster
3. Now put the items in order . Number 1
- Practice sounding out the sound is most useful on holiday . Number 8 is
/t/ and /st/ together the least useful.
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to
number the words in the order they hear they are going on a beach holiday
them. they need.......
- Play the recroding again
4.Listen and number the words you hear.
4. Production. best, boat, coast, lost, boot , desert.plaster.
-Guide the way to do . forest
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a 5. Listen again and repeat the words.
noticeboard.
6. Listen and repeat .Pay attention to the
bold-typed parts of the words.
- Listen and repeat

5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.

204
 Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 19/ 2/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 25/ 2/ 2014
Period 73: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use comparative and superlative
adjectives, notice the pronunciation of comparative and superlative adjectives.
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: can, can’t, must, mustn’t, should, should.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson. */ Brainstorming.

- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :
List the famous places which the Ss know.
2. Presentation. - Ha Long bay, Da Lat city, Sapa,…
- T can give some famous places and asks
some questions about Mount everest, Tra Co
beach, Amazon river…
3. Practice. 1.Vy is going to a quiz about wonders of
- Choose a more able St to act as Vy, and the world.Read the sentences and guess if
read the sentences to the class. they are true or false.
- Ss tick True(T) or False(F) in the box
provided.
205
- T asks Ss to stand up if they think the
sentence is True , or remain seated if they
think the sentence is False. 2.Listen to Vy giving the answer to the
qiuz . check your guesses.
- Play the recording and allow Ss to check Keys: 1.T 2.T 3.F
their answers. 4.T 5.T 6.T
3. Underline all the words ending in – est
- Ask Ss to lookback at Vy’s sentences, find in the quiz.
and underline all the examples of –est. 1. Mount everest is the highest mountain in
the world.
2. Ba Be lake is the largest lake inVietNam.
…
4.Complete the table with the
comparative and superlative adjectives

good better Best

bad worse The best
tall taller …
long … …
wide
large
hot

- T asks all the students in the class do on 5. Now Vy is talking about other amazing
their bokks, except only one who go to the places. Complete the passage..
board and do. 1- hottest 2- hotter 3- coldest
- Then T corrects if they do wrongly. 4- coldest 5- colder 6- bigger
7- highest 8- smaller
6. Cut up some pieces of paper. Write the
- T give the pieces of paper, and asks Ss to names of some famous places on them.
work in groups and make sentences about the - eg:
place. West Lake

- T writes the example on the board , then

guides the way to do. “West Lake is the largest lake in HN”
- T can go arround the class and help the
week students how to do.
4. Production. 7. Vy givingMai some feedback . read and
-Guide the way to do . underline the forms of must.
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard. 8 .Look at the classroom rules below.
206
5. Home work. Write....
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the
new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 24/ 3/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 1/ 3/ 2014
Period 74: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn’t.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip
to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in
the book at page 53 to ask some questions - Where are they? What are they doing?
and the Ss answer. - Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
2. Presentation. */ Newwords.
- T writes the newwords on the board and - tent | tent |
asks Ss to read all the newwords to check - waterproof coat | ˈwɔːtəpruːf kəʊt |
the pronunciation . - sun hat | sʌn hæt |
- diverse | daɪˈvɜːs |
3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the 2.Now make a list of the things must
travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls take to the Himalayas. then add things
207
some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry. you mustn’t take.

- One student stands up and read the title Must mustn’t

of activity 1. An other translates it into compass shorts
Vietnamese what they are going to do. sun cream t- shirt
painkills
- Ask Ss to use information in the text and backpack
their own ideas to fill in the “ must ” and “ plaster
mustn’t ” columns.

3. Role-play being a tour guide and a

- Create your own list and demonstrate the tourist.Tell your partner what to
activity with a more able Ss prepare for their trip to the
- Then ask the class to complete the role- Himalayas.Try to give reasons
play What to prepare for their trip to the
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class. Himalayas.
- Compass
- Check their ideas at the end - sun cream
- Painkills
Modal verbs - Backpack
Must + V - plaster
You must be careful in the garden Example:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
- T asks them to work in open pairs to B: OK I think you must take a waterproof
practice roling a play. coat. It is the highest mountain in the
world. It’s cold and rainy there!
4. Production. A: Yes. Anything else?
- Guide the way to do . B: …
- Ss can present their flowers to class or 4. Perform your Role-play for the class
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

208
 Ngày soạn : 26/ 2/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 3/ 3/ 2014
Period 75: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a postcard for specific information about famous places.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. warm up
- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang’s Ss look at the picture of Khang’s
neighbourhood is? neighbourhood. Answer individually'
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?

II. New lesson

- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these A. Reading:
words in the pasage. 1. Vocabulary:
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of Suburb (n): ngoại ô
the words in the context. Backyard (n): sân sau
Incredibly (adj): vô cùng, thật ngạc nhiên
Beach (n): bãi biển
(to) dislike: không thích
T asks Ss to read the text again and answer 2. Anwer the questions:
the questions. * Key:
-T asks Ss to note where they found the 1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
information that helped them to answer the 2/ Because it has beautiful parks and
questions. sandy beaches and fine weather.
-Ss can compare their answers with their 3/ They are very friendly.
partners. 4/ Because there’re many modern
-T corrects the answers: buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
Like
_ Ss scan the passage again and find the - It’s great for outdoor activities.
information to complete the table. - There’s almost everything here.
_ Ss note where they found the - Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.
information and compare with their
209
partners. - People are incredibly friendly.
- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board. - The food is very good.
- T checks and corrects it

B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the postcard and give
T reviews the expressions they can use to directions:
give directions. Directions:
1. Go straight on
2. Turn left ...
3. Go past…
4. Take the first
5. Go to the end
T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and 6. Go along
answering questions about the locations on 7. Cross
the map. T: Can you tell us the way to the market?
-T may model this activity with a good S1: First, go along Cu Chinh Lan street.
student. Then take the second turning on the left.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class After that go straight . It’s on your left.
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue. 5/ Ask and answer questions about the
-T selects some good pairs to act out their way to get to the places in your city.
dialogues in front of the class.

Homework:
Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Practice reading comprehension a blog.
-Assign home work. Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 2.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

210
 Ngày soạn : 27/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 4/ 3/ 2014
Period 76: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the passage about Sweden’s capital and some famous people
- Writing a postcard.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams. A. WARM-UP: Network

- Check and correct “Decribe your neighbourhood"

B. NEW LESSON
Pre I. Listening.
-Present some new words. 1. Vocabulary
super market: siêu thị
cafe': cà phê
secondary school: trường cấp 2
lower secondary school : trường cấp 1
sandy: cát
office: văn phòng, cơ quan
-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the
missing words.(EX1) 2. Prediction. (Ex1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map
carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get
the places mumbered 1-4 from the You
are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and 3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
completing the missing words in the 1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
dialogue. 4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers.
Share their ideas together. EX2.Choose the correct places
- Play the recording the final time then 1.A 2C 3F 4D
211
check their answers.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't
-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like like about a neighbourhood.
about a neighbourhood. 1. sandy beaches
-Hang the poster on the board. 2.heavy tracffice......
- Share their answers with partners 8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or * Activity 4. Make notes about how to write
dislike about living in their a post card, think about the things you like
neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full or dislike about it
sentences and they can use abbreviations Who
Share with their partners. T may read out What
the notes from some more able Ss to the .........
whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their * Act 5: Make meaningful sentences

ideas I'd like to tell you some good things and some
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm bad things about living in my neighbourhood.
for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them
write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the
wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T
comments.

C. HOMEWORK
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
-Assign home work. Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

212
 Ngày soạn : 1/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 8/ 3/ 2014
Period 77: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four

II. NEW LESSON:

A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
them repeat the words. Check their 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and B. Grammar
after the blands will provide the context for Activity 3 KEY
them to choose the correct adjectives. one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
fast happy exciting
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually hot noisy expensive
first. then they can check their answers with large quiet convenient
a partner before discussing the answers as a heavy difficult
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of polluted
their original answers so they can Activity 4 KEY
use that information in their Now you Activity 5 KEY
can......statements. 1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
-T elicits the language being practiced in this 4 more beautiful than
213
activity 5 more expensive than
C. Communication
-Ss read the questions and answer once or :*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
twice( they read them aloud). Then match :*Activity 7.
them. If there is time, have them write their Finished! Now you can..
notebooks. . name places
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions . give directions
and answers . .use adjective to
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self describe places.
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .compare things
areas and provide further practice.

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
-T ask ss look at the picture of two 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the neighbourhood.
tipical features of them. 2. write a description of it.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal - where it is
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their - what it has
imagination.( if have time) - how the people/ the streets/ the
weather ..is/ are?
- other...

III. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Learn the new words.
-Assign home work. -Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………............

214
 Ngày soạn : 5/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 10- 11/ 3 / 2014
Period 78 + 79: Review
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
At the end of this lesson Ss can review all the knowledge what they have learnt in units 7-9
2. Skill : reading, writing, listening and speaking.
II.PREPARATION.
T: Textbook, poster
Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher’s activities Students' activities

A. Warm-up: Lucky number
(Use ex1 to warm up) Key:
- Divide the class into 2 groups 1. C
- Each group in turn chooses one number and answers 2. A
the question 3. A
- With each right answer, they will have one point. If 4. B
they choose ‘lucky number’ they will have one point 5. D
without answering the question. 6. D
- Which group has more points will win the game
B. New lesson
I. Language
1. Pnonunciation
Ex2: Practise saying the sentences. Pay attention to
the pronunciation of the underlined words.
- Play the recording and ask Ss to listen carefully.
- Play the recording again and ask them to repeat the
sentences.
- T checks on their pronunciation of the key sounds.
2. Vocabulary
Ex3: Choose A, B or C to fill the gaps in the passage.
- Ss do separately and share their answers later with a
partner.
- Check Ss’ answer.
Ex4: Choose one of the words/ phrases in the box to
complete sentences 1-6. Key: 1.A 2. B 3.A 4.A 5.C
- Ask ss to look at the whole sentence to decide what
kind of word is missing before referring to the list of
215
words given.

3. GRAMMAR
Ex5: Complete the sentences with the present simple, Key:
pp or past simple form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Paris 2. Football
- This is a chance for ss to look back at the use of the 3. Local Television
verb tenses. Focus on the difference between the p.s 4. Country 5. Remote
and p.p Control
Ex 6: Are the underlined question words correct? If 6. Summer Sports
not, correct them.
- Ss must by now be familiar with, and quite skillful Key:
in, using question words. If the question word is 1. started 2. play
wrong, ask ss to explain why. 3. had 4. is
Ex7: Use the superlatives in the box to complete the 5. bought 6. has worked
sentences.
- This look back at the use of superlatives with long Key:
adjectives. Check Ss’ answers. 1. What 2. When
4. Everyday English 3. Cotrrect 4. How tall
Ex8: Choose the best replies for the questions. 5. Correct
- This create a situation in which one can use the
language already learnt, in daily conversation.
II. SKILLS Key:
Reading the most expensive
Ex1+2: the most popular
- Ss do this exercise individually, and then check it the most interesting
with their peers. the most colourful
- Let ss discuss among themselves before finalizing the most dangerous
the answers. Key:
Speaking 1.e 2.a 3.c 4.b 5.d
Ex3: Work in groups. Interview your friends about
their likes. Takes notes in the table and report it to
your class?
- This, again, revises the language items learnt but in Key:
a more dynamic form: interviewing and reporting the Ex1: 1.B 2. A
results Ex2:
Listening Who’s faster
Ex4: Listen to the interview with Nick and fill in the putting your toes together
blanks. Who’s faster
- This listening aims at revision of present oerfect Putting your toes together
tense. Play the recording and let ss write down the
answers.
Ex5: Listen to an interview with Phong and complete
216
the answers with information from the listening.
- This listening requires ss to listen more attentively
for specific information.
- Ask ss to read the questions first and determine what
information is needed for the answer Key:
- Then, T plays the recording. competition
Writing skiing
6. Mark and Tim visited India last summer. Look at country
the information in the table to write a complete canada
passage about their visit cartoon
- Ask ss to read the table and decide what tense/
sentence structure to use for the writing and how the Key:
information is organized. Only then should T let ss running race
write. Thailand
- Ss might want to change some details from the table. Wait and see
Encourage them to do so.
They can start with:
Last summer, Tim and mark visited india. They.....
Homework:
- Do exercises in workbook Whole class
- Prepare for the test 3

* Adjustment:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

*****************************************

217
 Ngày soạn : 9/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 18/ 3/ 2014

Period 81: Unit 10: Our houses in the future

Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- listen and read for specific information about houses in the future.
- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic “ house in
the future ".
II. Content:
- Vocab: house lexical items.
- Grammar: will / might
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough
time for all the activities.
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

I. Warm up
- Teacher writes on the board: “ My home ” - Listen and answer individually.
and ask what “home” means to them.
- T. writes their answer on the board.
- T. explains it can be the house or
apartment where you live or can refer to a
family living together.
I. Presentation
1. New words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach Apartment (n) căn hộ
vocab (situation, realia) Cousin (n) anh, em họ
218
 - T. reads the new words and ss. repeat . living room (n) phòng khách
- Checking vocab: Slap the board bedroom (n) phòng ngủ
* Set the scene: kitchen (n) phòng bếp
- Ask ss to look at the picture on page 30. bathroom (n) phòng tắm
? What are Mi and Nick doing? - Read in chorus.
? Where are they? - Answer the questions individually.
-We are going to listen and read a dialogue
between Mi and Nick. They are talking on - look at the picture on page 30.
skype = a system that allows you to make - They are playing computer.
telephone call using your computer playing games
2. Listen and read using the internet.
a).T. plays the recording the first time then - They are in their house/ room.
ask ss to the family members Mi talks
about.
? - Ss listen the second time and check the - Listen and give the answers.
answers. - Listen and check the correct answers.

Grandparents Uncle
b)- Allow ss to read the conversation again Dad V Aunt V
and complete the sentences. Mum V Cousin V
- Teacher gets feedback. Brother V

- Work independently then share answer

with their partner.
1: TV- sofa 4: noisy
2: town house 5: three
3: sitting on the sofa
Key: A: on E: in front of
II. Preposition B: next to F: between
1.Prepositions of place ? C: behind G: under
? Ask ss if they know the preposition in the D: in
box. - Work individually.
? Have ss do this exercise in pairs. Key:
2. Ask ss to write the sentences 1. F. The dog is between the bookshelf
individually then call 6 ss to write their and the bed.
answer on the board 3. F. The clock is between the pictures.
3. –Explain some new words. 4. F. The cat is in front of the
Pillow (n): cái gối computer.
219
 Cap (n) : cái mũ 5. F. The cap is next to the pillow.
Mouse (n): con chuột
Let ss to look at the picture of the room and
do ex.4 in pairs.
-Ask ss to correct the false sentences.
4. Have ss look at the picture again and - Answer the questions.
answer the questions. Key: 1. They are on the desk and the
bookshelf
2. They are on the floor.
3. Yes. It is
4. No. they are on the bed
5. It’s behind the bookshelf.
6. No, it isn’t. It’s next to the desk.
III. Consolidation . - Answer individually.
? What is the topic of the lesson today?
V. Homework
?Write ex.5 in the notebook. - Take note.
? Do exercises in the workboook.
? Prepare: Closer Look 1

Adjustments:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………................

=============================================

220
 Ngày soạn : 16/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 22/ 3/ 2014
Period 82: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:
- Review vocabularies.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /dr/ and /tr/
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Students Board & contents

A. WARM UP
Have Ss work in 2 teams TV
-Get them to write the things in the room. Things in
-Give feed back the room
fridge

B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.
1. Listen and repeat the words.
-Play the recording and let ss listen. hi-tech robot
-Play again and pause for them to repeat automatic dishwasher
each word. automatic washing machine
-Ss repead- read *. Put the words into groups.
-Correct pronunciation. living bedroom kitchen bathroom
room
-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1 wireles
into groups. TV
- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms. 2. Matching.
-Check the answer. Explain to them
which words go with each verb. Key. 1c 2d 3b 4c 5a
3. Ask and answer questions about
221
- Ss work in pair , using the information appliances.
in 2, ask and answer questions. Eg: What does a wireless TV do ?
-Then call some pair to practice in front It helps us watch TV programmes from
of the class. space.
-Correct their mistakes.

II. PRONUNCIATION
-Let Ss practice the sounds /tr/ and /dr/ 4. Listen and repeat
together. Ask Ss to observe the T’s lip 1. /dr/ :drop drip
positions for these two sounds. 2. /tr/: countryside travel
-Ss look at the T’s lip position and listen
and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen
and repeat.
- Ss listen and repeat as many times as
posible. *. Listen to the words and put them into
-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to two groups.
work individually. Key.
- Ss work in individual then check their /dr/ /tr/
answer in groups. drive travel
-Call some to write the answers on the drop
board .
-Give feed back. 5. Say the words you have writen in the
Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat table. Pay attention to the words / dr/
sentence by sentence. Help them to and /tr/.Ss add some more words
recognize the two sounds then underline
them in the sentences.
Home work C. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main points of the -Learn by heart new words.
lesson. -Practice the sounds /dr/ and /tr/.
-Assign home work. -Do Ex in Ex book.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

222
 Ngày soạn : 16/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 22/ 3/ 2014

Period 83: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future

Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. Teaching points:
- Review will and might.
- Practice speaking, reading and writing using will and might
II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write A. OLD LESSON
sentences. Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.
-correct, give marks. Eg: I play football for the school team.

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Review the future simple.
-Introduce “Miss Nguyet is interviewing GRAMMAR:
Duy for the school newsletter. Write the The future simple.
correct form of the verbs.” Form: (+) S + will + V
-Let Ss do the task individually in 5 (-) S + won’t + V
minutes. (?) Will + S + V ?
- Correct their answer. Or give Use: Something often happens in the future.
explaination if necessary. Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.
* Key.
-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the 1. will 2. won’t
223
interview. 3. will 4. will
-Observe and help ss when and where 5. will 6. will
necessary. 7. will 8. won’t
-Correct Ss’pronunciation & verb form. 9. will 10. won’t

Ex 2. Matching
-Let Ss read the example to understand * Key.1d, 2f , 3a , 4g.....
the task.
-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their
notebooks, refering to the interview.
-Go around to help. Ex3. make sentences with will and won’t.
-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board. Eg:
-Check their answer sentence by Robots will cook meals
sentence. Robot won’t take care of children

II. Review the possibility.

-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in
getting started. And find out the verbs GRAMMAR. Might for possibility.
used in the present continuous tense. Form:
-Write on the board. S + might + V-inf.
Use :Something is possible to happen in the
future.
Ex 4:Listen and read two poems then
decide whether the statements are T or F.
-Ask Ss to study the example first then 1T 2T 3F 4F 5T 6F
do the exercices. Ex 5: Work in groups, think about what
- Correct. you might do or have in the future.

-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.

C. HOME WORK
-Summarize the main points of the 1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two
lesson. tenses.
-Guide Ss to do home work. 2. Do Ex at home:
3. New lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

224
 Ngày soạn : 22/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 25/ 3/ 2014

Period 84: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future

Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION
I.Teaching points:
-To develop speaking skill and communicate with their friends about making friends and
how a good friend is.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters.
III. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students Board & contents

Warm up A. WARM- UP
Things we might do in the future Things we might do in the future
Have Ss play the game
-Get them to prepare six small pieces
guess the word
-Ss try to find out the letter building
the word.
-T gives feed back and decide which
is the winner of the game.
 excited
Pre- B. NEW LESSON
-Present new words. Tell Ss that these 1. Vocabulary
vocabs will appear in the task that Revise vocab
follow.
225
-Ss listen and answer to find out
the meaning of the words.
-note down.
Have Ss play game: ROR

While - 2.Game :
- Ask some Ss how they often make Things we might do in the future
friends, what they often say when they - Are you from around here?
first meet a new friend. What question - Do you like pop music?
they often ask... - How much pocket money do you get?
- Ss listen and answer. - What is your favorite subject at school?
- Let Ss read and tick the questions - Are you hungry?
individually. - Do you play football?
-Then ask them to discuss in group. - How do you gat to school every day?
-Go round and ask why or why not they - Where do you go shopping?
ticked this or that question.
-Allow Ss some time to write questions
on a piece of paper, share them with the
class or group.
3. Friendship quiz
- Ask Ss to give qualities of a good Eg:
friend in class (adjective). - friendly, generous, helpful, cheerfful,
- Ss give as many words as possible. reserved, humorous, socable, nice, polite…
-Divide the class into groups of 4or 5 .
- Ss take turns to interview the other
members, using the questions.
- Encourage Ss to give nice sentences Eg: “Friend are forever”
about friendship. ……………………..
Post- Eg:
-Choose some Ss to present to the class “This is Nam, he is my classmate. He is very
about their good friends and why they helpful, he often helps me in doing home
are good friends. work…..”

-Summarize the main point of the 4. Home work

lesson. - Learn by heart new vocabs
-Assign home work. -Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1. (reading)

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................

226
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 26/ 3/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 31/ 3/ 2014

Period 86: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future

Lesson 4: Skills 1
I. Teaching points:
- To develop reading comprehension skill and to know some more new words in context:
houses in the future and future appliances…
II.Teaching aids: - Poster
III. teaching steps

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

A. OLD LESSON.
-Call 2 Ss to tell about the appliances S1: washing machine
in the future. smart clock
-Correct some and give mark.

Pre- B. NEW LESSON

-Ask Ss to look at the three pictures I. Introduction.
then give their ideas about the schools Eg:-In the future, I can see some girls are
in the pictures. practicing doing something. So I think it is a
-Encourage Ss to give as many ideas comfortable school. It is a very good school.
as possible. -........
227
While II. Reading
-Let Ss read the three passages to 1. Ex1.
check their ideas. - Discussing with a partner
-Ss do the task indidually in 5 minutes
-Note some information.

-Ask Ss to read the passages again, 2. Ex2. check the idea.

then find the words in the passages.
Help Ss to understand the meaning of -It is a boarding school: many students study
the words: explaining or examples or and live there.
the Vietnamese equivalent. -The school is surrounded by mountains and
-Ss should pay attention to the context fields.
of the words. -…international school…for Ss from year 1 to
year 12, Ss learn English with foreign teachers.
-some creative students do drawings and
-Ask Ss to read the text again to find paitings in the art club.
words to finish the sentences. 3. Ex3. Complete sentences.
-Let Ss note where they found the 1. Students study and live in a…..school. They
information that helped them only go home at weekend.
complete sentences. 2. ……has an art club.
-Ss can discuss and compare with 3. There are girls’ school in…..
their friends. 4. Around An Lac school, there are fields and...
-Correct the answer then let Ss read 5. At Vinabrita School, Ss learn E with…
aloud the sentences in chorus then in Key:
individual. 1. boarding 2. Vinabrita 3. Australia
-Check pronunciation and intonation. 4. mountains 5. E speaking teachers.
Post- III. Speaking.
Ex4:Answer the questions
-Allow Ss to complete the table. - Background of the schools.
-Ss work in groups of 4 to discuss 1. the house will be located on the ocean
then complete the table. (Ss can use 2. There will be a swimming pool in front and a
the background of the school). large flower garden behind the house
-Ask some to talk to the class. 3. No

-Discuss any common errors and

provide further practice.

-Summarize the main point of the Home work

228
lesson. - Learn by heart new vocab
-Assign homework. -Do exercises in work book

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

=============================================

Ngày soạn : 27/ 3/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 1/ 4/ 2014

Period 87: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future

Lesson 4: Skills 2: listening - writing
I. Teaching points:
- Listen to Susie Brewer to understand more about houses.
- Help Ss write better with correct punctuation, write a description for a house.
II.Teaching aids:
-Posters, cassette.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

- Ss discuss in groups A. WARM-UP: Chatting

“The kind of house you like”.
- I like.....

- Plays the recording. B. NEW LESSON

229
- Ss listen only the first time. I. Listening.
-Allow Ss to read the exercise to guess the 1. Listen and choose the correct houses.
answer. * Key:
- Ss work in pairs, listen to the recording Linda : picture 3
again to choose the correct answers. Nick : picture 2
- Let Ss listen sentence by sentence to 2. Listen again and tick the columns:
check. Linda : 3,4,5,7.
Nick : 1,2,6

-Tell the class the important of II. Writing.

punctuation marks. 3. Ss work in pairs discuss the ideas about
-Hang the poster of Writing tip on the their dream house
board. What type of house is it ?
-Ss study the Writing tip and may ask Where is it located ?
some information. What it looks like ?
-Explain the new words and punctuation What surrounds it ?
marks. What appliances it has ?

-The class comment and check.

- Give the correction.
4. Ss fill in the table about your dream
-Allow Ss to correct and write in the house .
notebooks. + Type of house
-Go round and correct some. + Location
- Give the key. + Number of rooms
+ Surrounding
+Things in the house .....

5. Use the information in 4 to write about

dream house
In the future , My house will be ......

-Summarize the main point of the lesson. C. HOMEWORK

-Assign home work. -Finish a writing about dream house.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
230
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 30/ 4/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 5/ 4/ 2014

Period 88: Unit 10 : Our houses in the future

Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK

I. Teaching points:
- Through doing exercises, Ss revise the grammar points:
The simple present, the present progressive, vocabs.
II.Teaching aids:
poster, cassette.
III. Teaching steps

Teacher & Students Board & contents

-Have Ss work in 2 teams. A. WARM-UP.

-Ss write as many words as possible. Brainstorming.
+ robot
231
 * Appliances in the future + compass
+…

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Vocabs.
-Ss write the words. 1. Match the pictures.
- Correct mistakes. a. robot
-Repeat the words. b. automatic dishwasher
c. wireless TV
2. Think about what the appliances will
do in the future.
Ss write the answer. 1. Robot : clean our house, wash ....
-Correct .....................

II. Grammar.
4. Complete the sentences with will and
won’t.
-Call on Ss to give the answers. 1. won’t
2. will
-Give feed back and the correct answers. 3. will
4.won’t
5. will
6. won’t
5. Complete the sentences using might
or might not.
-Ss do Ex individually. 1. might
- call some to do on the board. 2. might
- Correct. 3. might not
4. might not
5. might , might
-Ss do Ex in pairs. III. Communication
- call some to do on the board. 5. work in pairs. Using the information
- Correct. in 2 ask and answer the questions.

C. PROJECT
-Ask Ss to write future appliances at home Your future appliances
-Divide the class into 3 groups.
-Ask Ss to use the pictures and their
imagination.

232
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. D. HOMEWORK.
-Asign home work. -Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 11 – Getting
Started.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 1/ 4/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 7/ 4/ 2014
Period 89: Unit 11: Our greener world
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I. Teaching points:
- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand about environmental problems and their
effects.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students Board & contents

Warm up A. WARM UP.
Ss work individually to make and answer * Ask and answer:
questions about environment. Ss ask and answer the question about
233
 our environment.

B. NEW LESSON
-Present new words. * Vocabulary
reused
- Check: Rub out and Remember. recycled
reduced
pollution
environment

1. Listen and Read 1.Listen & Read

? Look at the picture.
What are they talking about? a. 1. on a picnic
- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to 2. reusable ; natural
answer the questions. 3. the check-out
-Get them to read aloud the answers. 4. a / a reusable
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check. 5. recycling
-Give feed back. b. 1-b 2-c 3-a
- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to c. 1. understand
find the adjectives. 2. used to introduce ....
d. 1. I see
- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions. 2. Not at all
- Call some pairs to speak aloud. 3. By the way
- Correct some.
2. *Answers:
1. soil pollution
-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the 2. deforestation
poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask 3. water pollution
qs to check Ss’ understanding of the poem. 4. noise pollution
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their 5. air pollution
partner then read the poem aloud.
- Listen &correct 4. *Answers:
1b
- Ask Ss to match the words with the TV 2d
programmes 3e
- Let ss listen and read. 4c
- Explain some words if necessary. 5a

234
 C. CONSOLIDATION
- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the
things and say out the wordsplay the game.
-Ss write down as many as effects of the
environmental problem as possible.

Homework - Learn by heart new vocabulary

-Sumarize the main point of the lesson. - Practice reading “Listen and read”
-Asign home work. -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 1/ 4/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 7/ 4/ 2014
Period 90: Unit 11: Our greener world
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words to recycle, reuse, recycle
+/ Pronunciation /a:/ and / /
235
+/ New words: - rubbish, bulb, can , .......
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new How to protect our environment ?

lesson.
-vocabulary 1. Match theitems with the pictures then
Travel items practise saying the following items .
- Discuss some of the placesin the */ New words.
previous : - rubbish: rác thải
desert, mountain..... bulb: bóng điện
- Do I need a backpack in the desert? can : lon
- Why do you think so? .....

2. Presentation. 2. Write a word in the box under each

picture .
Ss listen and read. 1- rubbish
2- plastic bag
3. Practice. 3- glass
- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with 4- plastic bottle
Ss.
3.Put the words into group
- Read and act out the sentences for Ss. * Reduce:
- Clicit ideas for sentense1. * Reuse
- Then allow ss to complete the remaining * Recycle
sentences.
-Check their ideas at the end. 4. Listen to the” Three Rs” song and
then sing along
- Remind ss that in the introduce they
thought about useful things for a II. Pronunciation: /a:/, / /
beach,desert , mountain...
-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday 5.Listen and repeat , pay attention to
and they need to order the otems from how the underlined part is pronounces.
very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8) fast
had
- Practice sounding out the sound bag
/t/ and /st/ together plastic
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to
236
number the words in the order they hear 6. Listen again and put the words in the
them. correct column.
- Play the recroding again /a:/ or / /

4. Production. 7. Read the conversation, write /a:/ or / /

-Guide the way to do . stand
- Ss can present their flowers to class or class
make a display of the flowers on a ask
noticeboard.
8. Listen and check their answers
- Listen and check.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 6/ 4/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 12/ 4/ 2014

Period 91: Unit 11: Our greener world

Lesson 3: A closer look 2
I. Objectives.
237
 - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use conditional sentences – type 1
exactly.
- Ss can do all exercises correctly .
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: extra - boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson. */ Revision :

- Discuss some of the placesin the previous : What things can be reused, reduced ,
recycled ?
- Reused things : ....
- .....

2. Presentation.
- T can introduces how to use conditional 1. Listen again to part of the conversation
sentences – type 1 … from Getting started. Pay attention to the
If+S+V(present simple), S+will/won’t+V(infi) conditional sentences- type 1.
If clause main clause

3. Practice. 2.Write the correct form of each verb in

- SS read the sentences carefully and write brackets.
the correct form of each verb in brackets. Keys:
- Ss come to the board and write down the 1.is ; will plant 2.recycle; will help
answers. 3.will save; don’t waste
- T corrects 4. will have ; use 5. isn’t; will be

3. Match an if clause in column Awith a

suitable main clause in column B.
- Ask Ss to read carefully and match. 1c 2e 3b 4a 5d
4.Combine each pair of sentences below
to make a conditonal sentences – type 1.

1. If we pollute the air, we will have

- Ss read and make sentences breathing problems.
2. If people pollute the water, a lot of fish
will die.
3. If we .......

5. Use your own ideas to complete the

238
 sentences. Share the answers with a
classmate.
1. If you walk to school, ...........
- Ss complete the sentences 2. If you use recyled paper , ..........

6. Fun matching.
4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard. - Homewok
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words. Prepare the
new lesson.
- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare fpr the next lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

239
 Ngày soạn : 24/ 3/ 2014
Ngày dạy: 1/ 3/ 2014
Period 74: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn’t.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip
to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in
the book at page 53 to ask some questions - Where are they? What are they doing?
and the Ss answer. - Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
2. Presentation. */ Newwords.
- T writes the newwords on the board and - tent | tent |
asks Ss to read all the newwords to check - waterproof coat | ˈwɔːtəpruːf kəʊt |
the pronunciation . - sun hat | sʌn hæt |
- diverse | daɪˈvɜːs |
3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the 2.Now make a list of the things must
travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls take to the Himalayas. then add things
some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry. you mustn’t take.

- One student stands up and read the title Must mustn’t

of activity 1. An other translates it into compass shorts
Vietnamese what they are going to do. sun cream t- shirt
painkills
- Ask Ss to use information in the text and backpack
their own ideas to fill in the “ must ” and “ plaster
mustn’t ” columns.

240
 3. Role-play being a tour guide and a
- Create your own list and demonstrate the tourist.Tell your partner what to
activity with a more able Ss prepare for their trip to the
- Then ask the class to complete the role- Himalayas.Try to give reasons
play What to prepare for their trip to the
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class. Himalayas.
- Compass
- Check their ideas at the end - sun cream
- Painkills
Modal verbs - Backpack
Must + V - plaster
You must be careful in the garden Example:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
- T asks them to work in open pairs to B: OK I think you must take a waterproof
practice roling a play. coat. It is the highest mountain in the
world. It’s cold and rainy there!
4. Production. A: Yes. Anything else?
- Guide the way to do . B: …
- Ss can present their flowers to class or 4. Perform your Role-play for the class
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 26/ 2/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 3/ 3/ 2014
Period 75: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a postcard for specific information about famous places.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .

241
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. warm up
- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang’s Ss look at the picture of Khang’s
neighbourhood is? neighbourhood. Answer individually'
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?

II. New lesson

- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these A. Reading:
words in the pasage. 1. Vocabulary:
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of Suburb (n): ngoại ô
the words in the context. Backyard (n): sân sau
Incredibly (adj): vô cùng, thật ngạc nhiên
Beach (n): bãi biển
(to) dislike: không thích
T asks Ss to read the text again and answer 2. Anwer the questions:
the questions. * Key:
-T asks Ss to note where they found the 1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
information that helped them to answer the 2/ Because it has beautiful parks and
questions. sandy beaches and fine weather.
-Ss can compare their answers with their 3/ They are very friendly.
partners. 4/ Because there’re many modern
-T corrects the answers: buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
Like
_ Ss scan the passage again and find the - It’s great for outdoor activities.
information to complete the table. - There’s almost everything here.
_ Ss note where they found the - Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.
information and compare with their - People are incredibly friendly.
partners. - The food is very good.
- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it

242
 B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the postcard and give
T reviews the expressions they can use to directions:
give directions. Directions:
1. Go straight on
2. Turn left ...
3. Go past…
4. Take the first
5. Go to the end
T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and 6. Go along
answering questions about the locations on 7. Cross
the map. T: Can you tell us the way to the market?
-T may model this activity with a good S1: First, go along Cu Chinh Lan street.
student. Then take the second turning on the left.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class After that go straight . It’s on your left.
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue. 5/ Ask and answer questions about the
-T selects some good pairs to act out their way to get to the places in your city.
dialogues in front of the class.

Homework:
Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Practice reading comprehension a blog.
-Assign home work. Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 2.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 27/ 3/ 2014

243
 Ngày dạy: 4/ 3/ 2014
Period 76: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the passage about Sweden’s capital and some famous people
- Writing a postcard.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams. A. WARM-UP: Network

- Check and correct “Decribe your neighbourhood"

B. NEW LESSON
Pre I. Listening.
-Present some new words. 1. Vocabulary
super market: siêu thị
cafe': cà phê
secondary school: trường cấp 2
lower secondary school : trường cấp 1
sandy: cát
office: văn phòng, cơ quan
-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the
missing words.(EX1) 2. Prediction. (Ex1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map
carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get
the places mumbered 1-4 from the You
are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and 3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
completing the missing words in the 1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
dialogue. 4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers.
Share their ideas together. EX2.Choose the correct places
- Play the recording the final time then 1.A 2C 3F 4D
check their answers.
II. Writing.

244
 1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't
-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like like about a neighbourhood.
about a neighbourhood. 1. sandy beaches
-Hang the poster on the board. 2.heavy tracffice......
- Share their answers with partners 8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or * Activity 4. Make notes about how to write
dislike about living in their a post card, think about the things you like
neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full or dislike about it
sentences and they can use abbreviations Who
Share with their partners. T may read out What
the notes from some more able Ss to the .........
whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their * Act 5: Make meaningful sentences

ideas I'd like to tell you some good things and some
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm bad things about living in my neighbourhood.
for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them
write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the
wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T
comments.

C. HOMEWORK
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
-Assign home work. Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 1/ 3/ 2014

245
 Ngày dạy: 8/ 3/ 2014
Period 77: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four

II. NEW LESSON:

A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
them repeat the words. Check their 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and B. Grammar
after the blands will provide the context for Activity 3 KEY
them to choose the correct adjectives. one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
fast happy exciting
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually hot noisy expensive
first. then they can check their answers with large quiet convenient
a partner before discussing the answers as a heavy difficult
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of polluted
their original answers so they can Activity 4 KEY
use that information in their Now you Activity 5 KEY
can......statements. 1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
-T elicits the language being practiced in this 4 more beautiful than
activity 5 more expensive than
C. Communication
-Ss read the questions and answer once or :*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
246
twice( they read them aloud). Then match :*Activity 7.
them. If there is time, have them write their Finished! Now you can..
notebooks. . name places
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions . give directions
and answers . .use adjective to
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self describe places.
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .compare things
areas and provide further practice.

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
-T ask ss look at the picture of two 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the neighbourhood.
tipical features of them. 2. write a description of it.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal - where it is
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their - what it has
imagination.( if have time) - how the people/ the streets/ the
weather ..is/ are?
- other...

III. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Learn the new words.
-Assign home work. -Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………............

247
 Ngày soạn : 16 / 4 / 2014
Ngày ktra: 22 / 4/ 2014

Period 96: Test 4

I. Mục đích yêu cầu:
1. Đọc hiểu :
Đọc đoạn văn lựa chọn đáp án đúng , dựa vào nội dung bài học.
2. Viết:
Biết sử dụng cấu trúc và ngữ pháp sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
3. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ :
Biết phân biệt cách phát âm của từ, sử dụng kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học để chia động từ
và lựa chọn đáp án đúng.
II. Chuẩn bị :
Bài photo.
III. Ma trận :

Cấp độ tư duy Tổng

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Language Pho 4 4
1.0 1.0
focus Vocab 6 4 10
3.0 1.0 4.0
Gram 8 8
2.0 2.0
Reading 8 8
2.0 2.0
Writing 4 4
1.0 1.0
Tổng 10 20 4 34
248
 4.0 5.0 1.0 10.

IV. Đề bài :
Question I : Choose the correct answers
1 A. dad B. hat C. plant D. happy
2. A. favourite B. slight C. fine D. high
3. A. gather B. month C. father D. brother
4. A. that B. tap C. backpack D. classmate
Question II :Matching:
1. Where will we live ? A. Under the ocean
2. I think he might go to University … B. in the future
3. What will ther be around the house ? C. last week
4. You can take these bottles to the factory D. to recycle them
5. If students use recycled paper E. they will save a lot of trees
6. I went to Ha Noi F. - Many tall trees
Question III : Give the correct form of the verbs
1. He ( not meet ) his sister for 6 months.
2. If she ( not eat ) less, she ( be ) fat.
3. They ( go ) out last night? – No, they ( stay ) at home and ( watch ) TV.
4. She might ( live ) with her aunt in Ha Noi.
5. Tuan usually ( have ) breakfast at 6 o’clock.
Question IV : Choose the correct word marked A,B or Cto fill each blank in the
following passage.
AIR QUALITY
People need to breathe. If they don’t breathe, they ……… (1) ……. die. But how clean is the air
people breathe? If they breathe ……… (2) ……. air, they will have breathing problems and
become … (3) …….. Plants and animals need …… (4) ……. air too. A lot of the things … (5) ……. our
lives create harmful gases and … (6) …….the air dirty, like cars, motorbikes and factories. Dirty
air is called “ ……… (7) ……. air “. Air pollution can also make our Earth warmer. The problem
of air pollution started with the burning ……… (8) ……. coal in homes and factories.
1. A. will B. are C. must
2. A clean B. fresh C. dirty
3. A.well B. better C. ill
4. A. clean B. safe C. dirty
5. A. at B. in C. on
6. A. make B. get C. give
7. A. pollute B. polluted C. polluting
8. A. in B. for C. of
Question V : Complete the following sentences using given words:
1. soil / plants/ if / the / will / polluted / is / die.
2. on / be / there / Friday / meeting / will / a .
249
3. housework / help / might / robots / do / the / think / us / I.
4. rooms / in / there / house / be / four / will / my.
Question VI : Complete the following sentences with suitable prepositions:
1. You should have a shower instead ……………….... a bath.
2. I have bought a lot ……………….... things yesterday.
3. What type ……………….... house do you think it is ?
4. He can’t go with us because he has to look ……………….... his younger brother.

* Đáp án và thang điểm chấm:

Question I: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25đ
1C 2A 3B 4D
Question II: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5đ
1E 2C 3F 4B 5A 6D
Question III: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25đ
1.hasn’t met
2. doesn’t eat - will be
3. Did they go - stayed - watched
Question IV: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25đ
1. of 2. on 3. of 4. after
Question V: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25đ
1A 2C 3C 4A 5B 6A 7B 8C
Question VI: Mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25đ
1. If the soil is polluted, plants will die
2. There will be a meeting on Friday
3. I think robots might help us do the housework .
4. There will be four rooms in my house.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

250
I. TEACHING POINTS:

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.

- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.

- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.

II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.

III. TEACHING STEPS
Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board
I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
them repeat the words. Check their 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for B. Grammar
them to choose the correct adjectives.  Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually fast happy exciting
first. then they can check their answers with
251
a partner before discussing the answers as a hot noisy expensive
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of large quiet convenient
their original answers so they can heavy difficult
use that information in their Now you polluted
can......statements.  Activity 4 KEY
adj comparative form
-T elicits the language being practiced in this fast faster
activity convenient more convenient
noisy noisier
difficult more difficult
heavy heavier
expensive more expensive
happy happier
hot hotter
polluted more polluted
exciting more exciting
large larger
quiet quieter
 Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
-Ss read the questions and answer once or 5 more expensive than
twice( they read them aloud). Then match C. Communication
them. If there is time, have them write their :*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
notebooks. :*Activity 7.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions Finished! Now you can..
and answers . . name places
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self . give directions
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .use adjective to
areas and provide further practice. describe places.
.compare things
-T ask ss look at the picture of two D. Project
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the What is your ideal neighbourhood?
tipical features of them. 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood.
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their 2. write a description of it.
imagination.( if have time) - where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the
weather ..is/ are?
252
 - other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK.
-Assign home work. -Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.
Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 16/ 11/ 2013

Ngày dạy: 23/ 11/ 2013
Period 37: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to know and understand the famous places
such as : Ha Long Bay and Hue City. .
- Review the comparatives and supperatives.
- Newwords: essential, traditional, central, attraction, cuisine.
- Skill: Reading.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson. 4. Where is the passage from?
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures at page 5. What is it about ?
54 and make predictions about the text. 6. What do you know about the subject?
1.Before you Read .Look at the picture
below and make prediction about the
text. Then read and check your ideas.
1- HaLong bay and Hue
2- places
3- I ...
2. Presentation. */ Newwords
- T writes the newwords on the - essential | ɪˈsenʃl |
blackboard.
253
 - traditional | trəˈdɪʃnəl |
- central | ˈsentrəl |
3. Practice. - attraction | əˈtrækʃn |
- Ss read the newwords in chorus. Notice
- cuisine | kwɪˈziːn |
the pronunciation.
- T corrects if they pronounce wrongly. 2. Find these words in the passages in 1 .
then check the meaning.
- Ask ss to find the four words in the
passages and underline them. Essential , activities , attaction , cuisine
- Check their meaning.
- Ask ss to read the sentences then write 3. Read the following sentenses.then
true or false . tickT or F
1. In HL Bay some of the island look like
people or animals.
1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F 5T
- Answer the following questions. 4. Now answer the following questions
- Then ask the class to complete the role- 1- HL Bay in Quang Ninh
play. 2. You must take a boat ride.
Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class. 3.A visit to the imperial City is more
important.
- Check their ideas at the end. 4.Bacause people travel there just for the
food.
SPEAKING
5. Work in pairs. Make notes about ona
of the places in the brochure. use the
- Discuss with Ss which things they find information in the text and your own
interesting /uninteresting about HL Bay ideas.
and Hue - Tuan Chau is the biggest island in HL
Bay
- VNese seafood
- Ask Ss to close their book - Traditional dance
divide ss into A and B. 6. Tell your partner about the place.
- Tell group A to describe HL Bay.
- Tell group B to describe Hue.
4. Production. 7. Your friends are visiting your town.
- Tell the class they are ivsiting in your Think about what they must and
hometown mustn’t do while they are there. role-
- Ask Ss to suggest some advice play the conversation in group.
- Use must /mustn’t a- Things they must do/bring:
5. Home work. b: Things they mustn’t do/bring:
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare
254
the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================

Ngày soạn : 18/ 11/ 2013

Ngày dạy: 25/ 11/ 2013
Period 38: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what the Nick’s family are
talking in the travel agent and answer the questions.
- Write a travel guide about a place the students know.
- Skill: Listening and writing.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
255
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new
lesson. -Ask Ss to recall the two places in the
- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1
brochure in skills 1
HL Bay and Hue

2. Presentation. 1Nick’family are in the travel agent’s

.They want to go on holiday.They are
choosing a place from the brochure
above .which place do they choose?
3. Practice.
- Listen
- Ask Ss which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday - They go to HL BAy
destination
- Play the recording for the answer.
2. Listen again and answer the following
- Wok in pairs to ask and answer. questions.
1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha
Trang
2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui
Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL
Bay?
3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is
more interesting.
4- Yes, he is

3. Write a travel guide about a place WRITING

you know 3. Write a travel guide about a place you
- Ask some questions to prepare the class know
for the activity - Do you have picture or can you draw a
map of the place?
- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other natural
wonders?
- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?

256
4. Production.
4. In notes , fill each blank in the
- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen network with the inforation about the
places place.Then use these notes to write a
-Check their ideas at the end short paragraph about it.

1 – where is it?
2- How far is it?
3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?
5. Home work. 5- What is special about it?
- Copy and learn the new words. 6- what can you do there?
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================

Ngày soạn : 16/ 4 / 2014

Ngày dạy: 21/ 4 / 2014

Period 96: Unit 11 : Our greener world

257
 Lesson 7 : Looking back and project
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review words related to environment and
conditional sentence – type 1.
- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. TEACHING STEPS
Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board
I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe our environment problems Group of four

II. NEW LESSON:

- Tell Ss to write the words in their A Vocabulary:
notebooks individually and then check with 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let picture.
them repeat the words. Check their KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
pronounciation. 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and 2. Activity 2
complete them with the adjectives they have KEY 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 4 incovenient 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and
after the blands will provide the context for B. Grammar
them to choose the correct adjectives.  Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually fast happy exciting
first. then they can check their answers with hot noisy expensive
a partner before discussing the answers as a large quiet convenient
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of heavy difficult
their original answers so they can polluted
use that information in their Now you  Activity 4 KEY
can......statements. adj comparative form
fast faster
-T elicits the language being practiced in this convenient more convenient
activity noisy noisier
difficult more difficult
heavy heavier

258
 expensive more expensive
happy happier
hot hotter
polluted more polluted
exciting more exciting
 Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
-Ss read the questions and answer once or :*Activity 6.
twice( they read them aloud). Then match KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
them. If there is time, have them write their :*Activity 7.
notebooks. Finished! Now you can..
. name places
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions . give directions
and answers . .use adjective to
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self describe places.
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak .compare things
areas and provide further practice.
-T ask ss look at the picture of two D. Project
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the What is your ideal neighbourhood?
tipical features of them. 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood.
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their 2. write a description of it.
imagination.( if have time) - where it is / what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. III. HOMEWORK.
-Assign home work. -Learn the new words.
- Prepare for the test
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 13/ 8/ 2013

Ngày dạy: 20/ 8/ 2013
259
Period 2: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:
- Review vocabularies.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /ou/ and /A/
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.
Teacher & Students Board & contents
A. WARM UP
Have Ss work in 2 teams Math
-Get them to write the subjects they have subjects
learnt.
-Give feed back
English
B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.
1. Listen and repeat the words.
-Play the recording and let ss listen. Physic exercises
-Play again and pause for them to repeat English vocabulary
each word. History football
-Ss repead- read Home work lessons
-Correct pronunciation. Judo music
School lunch science
2. Put the words into groups.
-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1 play do have study
into groups. Football Homewo School Physics
- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms. music rk lunch English
-Check the answer. Explain to them Judo lessons History
which words go with each verb. exercises Vocabs
science
3. Put one of these words in each blank.
lesson football
science judo
-Tell Ss to do the task individually. homework
-Then call some ss to write on the board. 1. I do……with my friend, Vy.
-Correct their mistakes. 2. Duy plays….for the school team.
3. All the…. new school are interesting.
4. they are healthy. They do….every day.
5. I study maths, English and…..on
Mondays.
Key. 1. homework 2. football
3. lessons 4. judo
260
 5. science
4. Write sentences about yourself using
-Ask Ss to write sentences about the combination above.
themselves in their notebooks, using Eg: I/ We have English lessons on Tuesday
combination above. and Thursday.
- Ss write as many sentences as posible. ………………………
-Go around the class and correct some.
II. PRONUNCIATION
-Let Ss practice the sounds /ou/ and /A/ 5. Listen and repeat
together. Ask Ss to observe the T’s lip 1. /əʊ/ :judo going homework open
positions for these two sounds. 2. /ʌ/: brother Monday mother month
-Ss look at the T’s lip position and listen
and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen
and repeat.
- Ss listen and repeat as many times as
posible. 6. Listen to the words and put them into
-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to two groups.
work individually. Key.
- Ss work in individual then check their /əʊ/ /ʌ/
answer in groups. Rode Some
-Call some to write the answers on the Don’t Monday
board . Hope Month
-Give feed back. Homework Come
Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat post one
sentence by sentence. Help them to 7. Listen and repeat. Underline the
recognize the two sounds then underline sounds /ʊə/ and /ʌ/ you hear.
them in the sentences.
Home work C. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main points of the -Learn by heart new words.
lesson. -Practice the sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/.
-Assign home work. -Do Ex…in Ex book.
* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 15/ 8/ 2013

Ngày dạy: 22/ 8/ 2013
Period 3: Unit 1 : My new school
Lesson 3: A closer look 2
I. Teaching points:
261
- Review Present simple and Present continuous tenses.
- Practice speaking, reading and writing using these tenses
II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students Board & contents

-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write A. OLD LESSON
sentences. Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.
-correct, give marks. Eg: I play football for the school team.

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Review the present simple.
-Introduce “Miss Nguyet is interviewing Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.
Duy for the school newsletter. Write the * Key.
correct form of the verbs.” 1. has 2. Do you have
-Let Ss do the task individually in 5 3. love 4. Does Vy walk
minutes. 5. ride 6. teaches
- Correct their answer. Or give 7. doesn’t play 8. reads
explaination if necessary. 9. go 10. do

-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the Ex2.Role-play the interview.

interview.
-Observe and help ss when and where
necessary.
-Correct Ss’pronunciation & verb form.
Ex3. Correct sentences.
Eg:
-Let Ss read the example to understand Duy’s new school has a small playground.
the task. - Duy’s new school has a large playground.
-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their Key:
notebooks, refering to the interview. 1. Duy lives near here.
-Go around to help. 2. Duy likes/ loves his new school.
-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board. 3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
-Check their answer sentence by 4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.
sentence. 5. At break time, Phong reads in the library.
GRAMMAR:
The present simple.
- Then ask ss to give the rule and use of Form: (+) S(I, You, We, They) + V
the present simple themselves. S(She, He, It) + Vs/es
- Give more examples. (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V
1. I always walk to school. (?) Do/ Does + S + V ?
2. He always walks to school. Use: Something often happens or fixed.
262
3. We don’t like playing football. Ex4: Make questions then interview.
4. She doesn’t like playing football. 1.You/ ride your bicycle / to school.
-Do you ride your bicycle to school?
- Ss work in pairs. Take turns to ask 2. You/ read/ in the library/ at break time.
questions and give answers. 3. You/ like your new school.
-Go round and correct mistakes or give 4. Your friends / go to school / with you.
help when necessary. 5. You/ do your home work/ after school.

II. Review the present continuous.

-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in Ex5. Underline the present continuous in
getting started. And find out the verbs Getting started.
used in the present continuous tense. Eg: is knocking…, is having…, are
-Write on the board. wearing…
GRAMMAR. The present continuous.
Form:
(+) S + am/is/are + V-ing.
(-) S + am/is/are not + V-ing
(?) Am/Is/Are + S + V-ing?
Use :Something is happening now.
Ex6: Complete the sentences with the
correct form of the verbs.
-Ask Ss to study the example first then Eg: -Yummy! I (have)........school lunch with
do the exercices. my new friends.
- Correct. -Yummy! I am having school lunch with
my new friends.
1. I am not playing football now. I’m tired.
2. Shh! They are studying in the library.
3. Duy and Phong aren’t doing their
homework.
4. Now I am having an English lesson with
Mr Lee.
5. Phong, Vy and Duy are riding their bicycles
to school now.
-Ask them to say the differences Something often happens or fixed: The
between the two tenses. present simple
Something is happening now: the present
continuous
Ex7: Choose the correct tense of the verbs.
1. My family have/ are having dinner now.
-Ask Ss to do the task in pairs. 2. Mai wears/ is wearing her uniform on
-Call some to give their answers. Mondays and Saturdays.
- correct their mistakes and explain 3. The school year in Vietnam starts/ is stating
263
why… on Seps 5th
4. Now Duong watches/ is watching Ice Age
on Video.
5. Look! The girls kip/ are skipping in the
school yard.
Ex8. Read Vy’s e-mail to her friend.

-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.

C. HOME WORK
-Summarize the main points of the 1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two
lesson. tenses.
-Guide Ss to do home work. 2. Do Ex8 at home:
-Underline things that often happen or are
fixed.
-then underline things that are happening.
-Compare Vy’s first week with yours.
Eg: + Both Vy and I are having an interesting
first week.
+ I wear uniform every day but Vy wears
uniform only on Mondays and Saterdays.
+ ….
3. New lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 23/ 4 / 2014

Ngày dạy: 28/ 4 / 2014

Period 101: Unit 12 : Robots

Lesson 4 : Communication

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn’t.

264
 - Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip
to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.

- T can use the picture of mount Everest in - Where are they? What are they doing?
the book at page 53 to ask some questions - Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
and the Ss answer. 1.Read the travel guide entry
*/ Newwords.
2. Presentation. - comb
- T writes the newwords on the board and - bend over
asks Ss to read all the newwords to check - shout
the pronunciation . - gardening
* Listen and fill in each gap with the word
3. Practice. they hear.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the 1. words
travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls 2. shoes
some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry. 3. first
4. school
- One student stands up and read the title 5. water
of activity 1. An other translates it into 2.Interview three people about what
Vietnamese what they are going to do. skills they want their robots to have.

- Create your own list and demonstrate the

activity with a more able Ss
- Then ask the class to complete the role-
play 3. Perform your Role-play for the class
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end

- T asks them to work in open pairs to

practice roling a play.
265
4. Production.
- Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or
make a display of the flowers on a
noticeboard.

5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngày soạn : 24/ 4/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 29/ 4/ 2014

Period 102: Unit 12 : Robots

Lesson 5 : Skills 1
I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a postcard for specific information about famous places.
266
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. warm up
- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang’s Ss look at the picture of Khang’s
neighbourhood is? neighbourhood. Answer individually'
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?

II. New lesson

- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these A. Reading:
words in the pasage. 1. Vocabulary:
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of Space robots
the words in the context. apart from
types
space station
planet
T asks Ss to read the text again and answer 2. Anwer the questions:
the questions. * Key:
-T asks Ss to note where they found the 1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
information that helped them to answer the 2/ Because it has beautiful parks and
questions. sandy beaches and fine weather.
-Ss can compare their answers with their 3/ They are very friendly.
partners. 4/ Because there’re many modern
-T corrects the answers: buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
3. Read the text again and fill the table
_ Ss scan the passage again and find the - Home robots : can cook , ...
information to complete the table. - Teaching robots: ....
_ Ss note where they found the - Worker robots : .....
information and compare with their
partners.
- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it

B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the table and write what they
T reviews the expressions they can use to think each type of robot will be able to do

267
give directions. in the future:
- Home robots : they will be able to
recognise our faces ...
- Teaching robots: ....
T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and - Worker robots : .....
answering questions about the locations on 5/ Work in groups, talking about type of
the map. robots and what they will be able to do in
-T may model this activity with a good the future..
student.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their
dialogues in front of the class.

Homework:
Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Practice reading comprehension a blog.
-Assign home work. Review the lesson.
-Prepare skills 2.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 27/ 3/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 4/ 3/ 2014
Period 76: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
268
- Listening to understand the passage about Sweden’s capital and some famous people
- Writing a postcard.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams. A. WARM-UP: Network

- Check and correct “Decribe your neighbourhood"

B. NEW LESSON
Pre I. Listening.
-Present some new words. 1. Vocabulary
super market: siêu thị
cafe': cà phê
secondary school: trường cấp 2
lower secondary school : trường cấp 1
sandy: cát
office: văn phòng, cơ quan
-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the
missing words.(EX1) 2. Prediction. (Ex1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map
carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get
the places mumbered 1-4 from the You
are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and 3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
completing the missing words in the 1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
dialogue. 4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers.
Share their ideas together. EX2.Choose the correct places
- Play the recording the final time then 1.A 2C 3F 4D
check their answers.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't
-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like like about a neighbourhood.
about a neighbourhood. 1. sandy beaches
-Hang the poster on the board. 2.heavy tracffice......
- Share their answers with partners 8. many shops, and markets

269
 2. Practice.
-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or * Activity 4. Make notes about how to write
dislike about living in their a post card, think about the things you like
neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full or dislike about it
sentences and they can use abbreviations Who
Share with their partners. T may read out What
the notes from some more able Ss to the .........
whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their * Act 5: Make meaningful sentences

ideas I'd like to tell you some good things and some
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm bad things about living in my neighbourhood.
for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them
write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the
wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T
comments.

C. HOMEWORK
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
-Assign home work. Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………........................

Ngày soạn : 1/ 3/ 2014

Ngày dạy: 8/ 3/ 2014
Period 77: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
270
 - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their
opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board

I. WARM-UP.
-Decribe in your neighbourhood Group of four

II. NEW LESSON:

A Vocabulary:
- Tell Ss to write the words in their 1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each
notebooks individually and then check with picture.
thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park
them repeat the words. Check their 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
pronounciation. 2. Activity 2
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and KEY
complete them with the adjectives they have 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the 5. cheaper/ more expensive.
words, phrases and sentences before and B. Grammar
after the blands will provide the context for Activity 3 KEY
them to choose the correct adjectives. one syllabe 2 syllabes 3 syllabes
fast happy exciting
-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually hot noisy expensive
first. then they can check their answers with large quiet convenient
a partner before discussing the answers as a heavy difficult
class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of polluted
their original answers so they can Activity 4 KEY
use that information in their Now you Activity 5 KEY
can......statements. 1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
-T elicits the language being practiced in this 4 more beautiful than
activity 5 more expensive than
C. Communication
-Ss read the questions and answer once or :*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
twice( they read them aloud). Then match :*Activity 7.
them. If there is time, have them write their Finished! Now you can..
notebooks. . name places
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions . give directions
and answers .
271
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self .use adjective to
assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak describe places.
areas and provide further practice. .compare things

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
-T ask ss look at the picture of two 1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your
neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the neighbourhood.
tipical features of them. 2. write a description of it.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal - where it is
neighbourhood, using the pictures and their - what it has
imagination.( if have time) - how the people/ the streets/ the
weather ..is/ are?
- other...

III. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main point of the lesson. -Learn the new words.
-Assign home work. -Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.

Adjustments:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………............

272
 Ngày soạn : 9 / 5 / 2014
Ngày dạy : 12-13 / 5 / 2014
Period 108 + 109 : Revision
I. Aim :
Revise what Ss study in English 6
- Tenses :
+ present simple tense
+ Present progressive tense
+ future tense
+ present perfect tense
- Grammar :
+ conditional sentences type 1
II.Practice
Exercise 1: Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences
1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week.
a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ............sports .
a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They .....playing soccer.
a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week .
a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue?
a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ........to the cinema .
a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...............is the cake ?
a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He .......TV at the moment
a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is watching
* Answer key : 1A 2A 3B 4D 5B 6A 7B 8D
Exercise 2: Put the verb in the correct tense
1, We...............................(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ........... ........Lan.............(travel) to school?
4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer .
* Answer key :
1. Are playing
2. is
3. often does – travel
273
 4. go

Exercise 3: Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
* Answer key :
1c 2d 3f 4a 5b 6e
Exercise 4: Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) :
Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First,
she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is
going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho
Chi Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
* Answer key :
1F 2T 3T 4F
Exercise 5 : Complete the following sentences using given words:
1. soil / plants/ if / the / will / polluted / is / die.
2. on / be / there / Friday / meeting / will / a .
3. housework / help / might / robots / do / the / think / us / I.
4. rooms / in / there / house / be / four / will / my.
* Answer key :
1. If the soil is polluted, plants will be die
2. There will be a meeting on Friday
3. I think robots might help us do housework in the future
4. There will be four rooms in my house.
Exercise 6: Complete the following sentences with suitable prepositions:
1. You should have a shower instead ……………….... a bath.
2. I have bought a lot ……………….... things yesterday.
3. What type ……………….... house do you think it is ?
4. He can’t go with us because he has to look ……………….... his younger brother.
* Answer key :
1. of 2. of 3. of 4. after
* Adjustment :

274
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

275
276